JP6692838B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and that can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, a giraffe, an elephant, or a lion is displayed during variable display of the identification information according to the set value before and after the set value is changed, and the set value is suggested. There was a game machine (for example, see Patent Document 1). Further, there has been a gaming machine in which a so-called latent probability changing state, which is a highly accurate low base state, is repeated (for example, refer to Patent Document 2).

JP, 2010-200902, A JP, 2011-78670, A

However, in the case of executing the effect suggesting the setting as in Patent Document 1 in the game machine as in Patent Document 2, there is room for improvement in the timing of executing the effect suggesting the setting.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can draw attention to the execution timing of the effect that suggests the setting and that enhances the interest of the game.

A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, high probability state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the normal state after the end of the advantageous state,
A setting suggestion effect executing means capable of executing any one of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-6) that suggests the set value to the player. For example, the production control CPU 120),
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (eg, big hit A) and a second advantageous state (eg, big hit D), which is less advantageous than the first advantageous state,
Wherein the case which has been controlled to the first preferred conditions, the rate of performing the setting suggested effect between when adjusted to the second advantageous condition Ri Do different (e.g., the jackpot A, but sets suggest effect is not executed jackpot In D, setting suggestion production may be executed) ,
The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the number of times the second advantageous state is controlled.
With such a configuration, since the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the type of advantageous state, it is possible to focus attention on the execution timing of the effect that suggests the setting, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.
Further, (1) the gaming machine according to the present invention,
Further comprising setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set among the setting values of the plurality of stages,
The setting suggestion effect executing means may limit execution of the setting suggestion effect when the setting value information output from the setting value information output means is not normal.
Further, (1) the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notifying unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notifying unit can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the suggestive effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 9C).
With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even after the notification of the title.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
The rate of control to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, the stick controller 31A or push button 31B),
A specific display execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for performing a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection unit,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) are displayed. Is possible,
In the ineffective period of the detection by the detecting means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17E, FIG. 18I),
During the valid period of the detection by the detection unit, the action effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18 (J) and 18 (K)).
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the shutter image 31AK061 of the first size to be displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A) Etc.) and a second suggestion display in which the display size is the second size (e.g., reach title image 31AK062 of the second size to be displayed at the time of reaching the reach title shown in FIG. 19D) and the like. The display device 5 and the CPU 120) for effect control are further provided,
The display means is
A plurality of types of elements having different modes (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) configured to include
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. The shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D may be displayed such that the elements E1 to E5 are included therein.
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the specific image regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. This makes it possible to accurately notify that the specific image has been displayed.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure for demonstrating a variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the determination rate in a notice production determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | generation effect | action of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | generation effect | action of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | generation effect | action of a modification. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame being opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a non-reach lost variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 112IW. 6 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process and a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed when a power supply is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial result determination table. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a pre-game suggestive effect determination table. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the game suggestion production decision processing. It is an explanatory view showing a game suggested effect determination table. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production decision processing during the big hit. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit mid-course suggestion effect determination table, a character effect effect determination table, and a light guide plate effect determination table. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure for demonstrating the specification and a jackpot classification table in each set value. It is a timing chart showing the flow of various effects. It is the figure which shows the production operation example of setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows a setting suggestion production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting suggestion production processing. It is the figure which shows the production operation example of setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows a setting suggestion production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting suggestion production processing.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

  In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is moved. Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is also closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. The universal figure game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of universal figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) Is displayed as a stop special symbol, the "big hit symbol" is reached and the big hit symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing symbol".

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

  In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.) the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

  After the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure changing time (period during which the special figure is changed) is executed as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

  The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of the times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset. It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

  A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to be "small hit".

  The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on / off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

  As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing at which the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

  In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

  In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special drawing game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss".) May be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach-miss"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) fixed decoration pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes “reach lost”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

  The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (the game ball passes or the game ball passes from the various switches for detecting the game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23)). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), The status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting / extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

  When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power interruption has been performed or is being restored from the power interruption. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can regularly execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to execute the predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port are performed via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, controlling the game state, etc. See below).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The execution of the general figure game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the general figure reservation display unit 25C is turned on to display the number of general figure reservations.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of holding memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. In addition, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the look-ahead determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" when the big hit type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

  When making various determinations based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random number value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the jackpot opening state based on that the display result is "jackpot" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of times of execution of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The processing during the big hit opening ends.

  The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. Then, when the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

  The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

  The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during opening of the small hitting ends.

  The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter / timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I / O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

  After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, the processing for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative display variable display (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative design in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative design.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hitting finish effect. The value is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

  The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

  The big hit midfield effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description was a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

  The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed by using the hardware resources of the other device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and reach types in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8 (A), in the present embodiment, the variation pattern PA1-1, PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode and the display result is “miss” is displayed. , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is “miss”. The reach change pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., the display result is “big hit”. Variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is, as represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B. <Higher in order of Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the reach effect of the super reach, there is a case where a development effect of developing (promoting) to a reach with higher reliability is executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to one level higher super reach, but a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more steps is also provided. Also, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach, which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the title notification mode differs depending on the reach type. Specifically, the super-reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super-reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super-reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively agitated, and the effect of production is improved. It should be noted that the notification mode of the title may be changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title character (Gothic font, Mincho font, etc.) and typeface (line book, open book, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. .. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the decorative pattern showing the number 7 on “left” and “right” is stopped, and the reach mode is reached. After that, the effect branches according to the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach production is started, such as when the introduction part of the reach production of the super reach (also referred to as super reach production) is finished, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), the entire screen of the image display device 5 The title 31AK002 (here, "SP reach A" here) of the super reach A is displayed on the screen, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here "super reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of the super reach A is erased, the character 31AK003 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are confronted with each other, as shown in FIG. 9 (E). The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and when the teammate character wins in the battle production, it becomes a big hit, and when the teammate character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

  Note that when the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the speaker 8 may output a voice corresponding to the dialogue. The dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super reach B)
In the case of the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 9 (F), the title 31AK005 of the super reach B (here "SP Reach B" is displayed, and the speaker 8 outputs a voice corresponding to the title name of Reach ("Super Reach B" in this case) to notify the title of Super Reach B. It After that, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is erased, as shown in FIG. 9 (G), the character 31AK006 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are confronted. The succeeding part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

  In this way, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the player has shown the introduction part of the super reach effect, etc., so that the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Further, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the titles are In the introduction part until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach is performed after the super-reach effect is started and which title is notified. Super-reach A and super-reach B are not limited to completely commoning the presentation mode until the title is informed, and it is possible to determine which super-reach will be achieved by paying attention to the production. You may make it a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, the effect of displaying the enemy character or suggesting the enemy character) is executed in a mode related to the subsequently notified title. You can By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player comes to pay attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super-reach will be performed.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the characters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy") is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation is the expectation of a big hit, but it does not have to be exactly the same as the reach's big hit reliability.

  It should be noted that the notification of the voice of the super reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is changed depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 9 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 are continuously reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Note that FIG. 9 (I) shows the same effect contents as in FIG. 9 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the enemy character character 31AK009 is displayed, the character 31AK001 lines 31AK004 are displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. It

(Super reach E)
In the case of the super reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of the super reach E (here, the characters “SP reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is announced. Note that in Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 that is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 face each other is displayed. Executed. In this way, in Super Reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach effect. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E with low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation by notifying the title without stopping the reach effect. On the other hand, in the reach effects of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach effects is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9D, 9F, and 9F). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of super reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the super-reach reach effect with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach that have a low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, and in the case of a reach with low jackpot reliability, The title may be announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. The title is announced on a part (second area) of the screen. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be that the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability. Further, in the case of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect, the display area may be different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be different.

(Expectation level indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in super-reach A and super-reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, super-reach D, which has a lower jackpot reliability than super-reach A and super-reach B, is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in, the expectation level suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation level suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his / her expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, you may make it display an expectation degree suggestion display in at least one part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the expectation indication is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), etc., and the expectation may be indicated by a meter or a gauge, or it corresponds to the expectation. The displayed numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9 (H) and the like, when the number of black stars is shown, half (corresponding to half) black stars may be displayed, and the number of stages of expectation may be increased.

(Timing display end timing)
In addition, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach effect can be focused. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determination effect described later is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during super reach production. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title display end timing may be changed at any timing, because the effect of production can be improved.

  Here, although the effect operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, for example, title notification or expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each of the reach effects has been executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display), the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is the “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “miss”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10 (B), a decided effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 10C, an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. The fixed decorative design is derived. If the display result is “miss”, an image showing that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach lose combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the decided effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the decided effect, and it is possible to execute the title notification with a sharpness.

  In the example of the effect operation shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced and the variable display is executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, but during the reach effect. The method of displaying the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  When displaying a hold display, an active display, a character that is permanently displayed during variable display, and a display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, it is not displayed as appropriate during the reach effect of super reach in order to draw attention to the reach effect. May be At that time, these displays may be kept displayed during the reach production with low reliability such as the super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting the reach effect with low reliability, and to focus on the reach effect in the reach effect with high reliability.

(Development production)
Next, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and an effect that the screen is torn is executed. After that, in the case of developing into the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of the super reach A is notified, and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. When developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11 (D), the title of super reach B is announced and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the developed reach is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11B, and may be an effect in which the screen gradually cracks and cracks, or a sandstorm (display indicating a failure) is displayed. You may do it. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a developmental development effect such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion production)
In the example of the production operation shown in FIG. 9 (H), the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 displays the black stars indicating the expectation from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, and step by step. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which shows an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, five white star expectations indication indication 31AK021 is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK021. A production that fits into one of the white stars of is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 12F, the black star is highlighted such that it glows. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, black stars are displayed one by one and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step, but there are two or more black stars. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more steps. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed to raise the expectation by half. In this case, different voices may be output, or the same voice may be output, depending on the number of stars displayed (the number of stages of expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the expectation suggestive production is diversified, and the production effect is improved. In addition, the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation increasing at one time, and it fits into the white star of the degree of expectation indication, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation increasing You may make it perform the effect like.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command that specifies a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays or the game state, or may be changed by the player's operation.

  FIGS. 12G to 12L are example production operations of title notification and expectation suggestion production in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production modes. In the normal mode, the title notification and the expectation suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of super reach D is the reach effect of super reach D2 having a different effect mode from the reach effect of super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, although the voice corresponding to the reach title name is output from the speaker 8, a voice different from the normal mode (for example, voice having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 A production that fits in one of the white rhombuses is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound "Pong" indicating that the black diamonds indicating the degree of expectation have increased. As shown in FIGS. 12J and 12K, the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the reach expectation. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted, such as shining, as shown in FIG. In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) that is determined according to the player's selection, the game status, etc., the title notification mode is made different, and the effect is diversified. improves.

  Although FIG. 12 shows an example of the production operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, other reach productions (title notification, expectation suggestion production) depending on the production mode (state when the reach production is executed). (Including) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified and the execution rate of the title notification may be changed. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, an effect according to the player's preference can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which reduces the number of the display which suggests stepwise. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the characters of "SP reach C") is displayed, thereby The reach C title is announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is 3 is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that, after the movable body 32 has operated, the development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary performance)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), the title notice is executed in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red. As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is executed. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14, the title display mode (display color) may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing of displaying the title in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

  In addition, when the title announcement in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound according to the changed display mode may be output after the display mode of the title has changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or a development effect in which the degree of expectation of being controlled to a big hit advantageous state is improved. By doing so, when the title is once notified, the effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. In the notice production determination process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If it is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and “black” to “fruit pattern”. The ones that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability varies according to the timing of change in the title display color. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

  The "fruit pattern" may be such that the title characters are displayed in bold and the characters themselves are "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, as shown in FIG. 14, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the changing timing may be determined as either one. Then, in the case of a super-reach with a short title display period (for example, super-reach A or super-reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than that of a super-reach with a long title display period.

  When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16 (A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16 (B) is set in the special mode. Determine the title display color in different proportions. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode (display color or change timing of the display color) of the title announcement depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a dialogue notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed by the display mode of the character's dialogue in the reach production of super reach (for example, the display color of the dialogue).

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the character dialogue (whether or not to execute the dialogue notice) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “miss”. As shown in FIG. 16 (C), the display color of the lines in the reach effect is changed from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the production is improved. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the dialogue is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the effect modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is achieved. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timing of changing the presentation mode of the title announcement and the dialogue announcement. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  It should be noted that instead of the speech notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the notice production, a plurality of change timings of the production mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability varies according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is ended.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the title notice and the line notice can be executed in the case of super-reach, but the title notice in the case of a specific super-reach (for example, other than super-reach with low reliability) is possible. Alternatively, at least one of the speech notice and the notice may be made executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination rate shown in FIG. 16, but the determination rate is arbitrary, and the determination rate may be different depending on the type of super reach, for example. By doing so, the notice effect corresponding to the type of reach can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable presentation modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the effects are varied and the effect of the effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and type of executable production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a notice presentation with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect form changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect in which the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image or the like) of the effect effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed by the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialog notice changes according to the effect mode of the action effect (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may differ, or the title effect may change. The ratio of which presentation mode is changed and the ratio of which effect is changed may be different from that of the speech notice, or the ratio of how many colors (how many stages) it is changed may be different. . By executing such action effect, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the dialogue is acted when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect modes. By doing so, the effect effect according to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect effect is improved.

  As another example of such action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a dialogue is displayed according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the effect contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although referred to as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed to the vicinity of the image display device 5 or the like, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. On the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the notification of the title, like the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the title is notified on the image display device 5. By doing so, the title and the expectation suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation suggestion display can be easily understood.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the notification of the title related to other effects (informing mainly displaying characters). May be. For example, in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 5 as the notice effect (for example, the look-ahead notice effect), the transition zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification. In the case of presenting a mission (“reach with 7”, “use the stick controller to annihilate the enemy”, etc.) and perform a mission effect that gives the player an advantageous state when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( 10 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a decided effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win / loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased and the interest is improved.

  FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are diagrams showing a production operation example of super reach in a modified example in which an operation production is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after the reach mode is set on the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), a character 31AK041 which is a friend character and a character 31AK042 which is an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 18 (G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image showing that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode with higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17 (D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17 (E), the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a pleased character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is changed to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is shot from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is hit by the bullet. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modified example, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without the effect effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the effect effect has been executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

  After that, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is deleted as shown in FIG. 18 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the central portion as shown in FIG. 18 (K). , A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is in an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 18L, an image 31AK052 showing that the teammate character has won is displayed. Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a fixed decorative design which is a big hit combination is derived. Note that when an operation is not detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

  In this modified example, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect images, and when the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly-reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect effect is improved and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  In the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the reach title notification and the expectation degree suggestion display are omitted, but the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. It may be executed. The determination related to the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether the operation effect is present, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which shows the expectation degree of control to an advantageous state, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, the specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed by including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 forming the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach production, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach letter in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

  When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 19 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set as shown in FIG. 19 (c).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed, for example, in a small size on the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

  Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "hot and hot" indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Note that the common sound and the specific sound have been described in the case where the output periods are completely separated, but the output periods may be partially overlapped.

  Then, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19E is executed. The enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "Battle Victory!" Is displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production is completed, the variable display screen is returned to the original numerical design. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of "777" is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 that form the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be preferably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 which have different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

  Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence / absence of shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In that case, the shutter effect may be determined based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the title display color is determined to be a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed together with the determination regarding the shutter effect in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 112IW)
Next, the characteristic part 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-1 and 20-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board constituting a gaming board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is shot into the game area by a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, in the gaming machine frame 112IW003, a glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window is provided between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface of the gaming machine frame 112IW003. The glass door frame 112IW003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game hall into the lock and unlocking it, and a player other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and the glass door frame. The 112IW003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot probability (ball-out rate) described later in the setting change state, are set. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

  The setting switch main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, is housed in the substrate case 112IW201 together with the main substrate 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 112IW201.

  Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Further, the setting key 112IW051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the amusement hall, so that only a store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the characteristic portion 112IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used in combination.

  Further, a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged on the board case 112IW201. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged on the front surface of the substrate case 112IW201 when the main substrate 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized without opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the characteristic part 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, a board including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 112IW052 at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , And is made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. The security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 20-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab contacts (or approaches) the right part of the board case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. By doing so, the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 become inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 to move from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By separating, the covering state by the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the state becomes an operable state.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 112IW, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the operation of the operation portion including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is restricted by the security cover 112IW500A. While the state is maintained, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restriction state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. It becomes a state.

  Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless the clerk of the game hall or the like opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

  However, in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. An illegal member such as a wire or cell plate is inserted between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the setting keys 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as changing the setting value by operating the setting switch 112IW052 or the setting switch 112IW052 is performed, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch by the security cover 112IW500A with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 closed. Restricted state in which operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is restricted By being maintained, it is possible to suitably suppress the abuse.

  Further, even when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the security cover 112IW500A covers the right rear side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, the board is passed through the security cover 112IW500A having transparency. Since it is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201, it is possible to easily confirm the mounting surface on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 and the like on the main board 11 are mounted and the seal and the like.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the characteristic part 112IW, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game controlling microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game controlling microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 and 20-5, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display of a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), and FIG. -4 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), misalignment shown in FIG. 20-6 A fluctuation pattern determination table, a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a general pattern variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the jackpot (ball-out rate) is changed. .. The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value being in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the advantage gradually increases.

(Display result judgment table)
20-4 (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display. If the set values are “2” and “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 in the non-probable variation, 1/32 in the probable variation). Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. You win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/300 when uncertain change, 1/30 when probability change) than in some cases. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is a target for variable display, with the same probability (1/300 when uncertain variation, 1/30 when probability variation) To do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 in the non-probable change, 1/28 in the probable change) than when it is "2". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, with the same probability (1/280 when uncertain variation, 1/28 when probability variation) To do.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). That is, the jackpot winning is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design.

  In addition, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the fact that the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end number) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation is applied. If it is the number of times of termination, the probability change continuation rate (rate of condominium) may be configured to increase in the order of set value “1” <set value “2” <set value “3”.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, a total of three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 20-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the feature section 112IW, when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the proportion of which jackpot type is determined is different.

  The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot type A to jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referred to when deciding on either.

  In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), a determination value corresponding to a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned to each set value, but the assignment value is assigned for simplification of description. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-7, which will be described later, are actually assigned with determination values corresponding to random numbers. For simplicity, the percentage of assigned decision values is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type C is high, and when the setting value is “2”, The determination value is assigned such that when the jackpot type B has a high proportion and the set value is “3”, the jackpot type A has a high proportion.

  Here, the jackpot type in the present feature portion 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 20-5 (B). In the present feature portion 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12, the big hit game state is started. It is a period in which the fanfare production as the production operation to be notified is executed.

  The interval period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and on the effect control board 12 side, after the round in which the big winning opening is opened is finished, Is a period in which an interval effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

  The ending period is, for example, a period in which the big hit end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is the period to be done.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the jackpot type A, the longest in the jackpot type B, and the longest in the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

  As described above, in the characteristic part 112IW, when the setting value is “1”, the percentage of determination as the jackpot type C is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the percentage of determination as the big hit type A is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In the characteristic part 112IW, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1”. It is also configured such that the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of “<“ 2 ”<“ 3 ”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is high, it is possible to lengthen the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, that is, delay the progress of the game, and thus the gambling gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  In the feature part 112IW, during the big hit game, it is configured to be able to execute a big hit medium suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value, but this big hit medium suggestion effect is performed in the fanfare period, interval period and ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fun of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased. Also, by directing the interest of the player to the suggestive effect during the big hit, it is possible to make the duration of each period less noticeable.

  In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is not easily noticed by the players is commonly executed.

  Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each big hit type, and the percentage of which big hit type is determined for each set value is different, so that the big hit When the winning probability (ball payout rate) is set high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set to be longer, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the configuration is not limited to this. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the determination values are set such that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which a relatively long period is set is selected in order of the big hit type A <B <C is used. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In any one of the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control which are executed after the end of the big hit game state are performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present characteristic part 112IW). The figure game ends, or the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time saving control and probability variation control may be different for each big hit type. May be, in the case of a specific big hit type, high-precision control and time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state, continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state It may be done. In the case of such a specific big hit type, a big hit game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, that is, a so-called condominium state. In the present characteristic portion 112IW, the jackpot rate is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. The rate (rate of consecutive holidays) may be different.

  Further, in the present characteristic unit 112IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the big hit type A to the big hit type C (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, presence / absence of time saving control and probability variation control, number of times of control, etc.) It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period is different, for example, for each big hit type, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control is different, and the advantage is different You may do it. In this case, the effects during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

  In the characteristic part 112IW, according to the set value, the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C at different rates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value that is set, one of the jackpot types A, the jackpot types B, and the jackpot types C that cannot be determined or There may be more than one. That is, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

  Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period differ depending on the type of jackpot is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are not limited to the type of jackpot. The period may be different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to the set value "1" to "3". Further, for example, depending on which one of the set values “1” to “3” is set, a lottery process is performed with a selection probability according to the set value, and a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are determined. You may.

  In this way, in the characteristic part 112IW, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different depending on the set value that is set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. ..

  In addition, in the feature part 112IW, the big hit type is determined by using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

  Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the larger the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the big hit probability increases, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined). Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

  Further, in the present characteristic part 112IW, the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the one, the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game property of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the big hit game ends to a probable state based on passing a predetermined count switch, the percentage of game balls passing through the count switch during the big hit game varies depending on the big hit type If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 (so-called V probability variation type), the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the game ball is in a high base (during time reduction control). Or as a game of controlling the jackpot gaming state based on passing a predetermined count switch provided special variable winning ball device 7 (the so-called one two-kind mixed type). Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same in playability as 1 to 3, the jackpot probability is higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3, while the jackpot is being played. The number of award balls that can be acquired may be set to a small number (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Further, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (a game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time it is played, and when the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball is It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Variation pattern determination table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is previously determined that the variation display result is “big hit” and a variation display result may be “missed”. A loss variation pattern determination table used when determined in advance is prepared in advance.

(Loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic part 112IW, a period from the time when the setting is changed at power-on to the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) and other periods ( In the following, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and different loss variation pattern determination tables are used.

  Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first lost variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 20-6 (B). The variation pattern is determined using the second lost variation pattern determination table. In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on. In addition, using a real-time clock or the like, a special period may be set in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be a special period.

  20-6 (A) and 20 (B) show the normal reach loss and the super reach loss in the order of the setting values "1" <"2" <"3" in the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables. The determination value is assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of the normal reach or the super reach differs depending on the set value, and thus the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach or the super reach is executed.

  Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), and further has the set value. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of executing the normal reach than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), and thus the motivation for playing the game in the special period. Can be given, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

  Note that, for example, fluctuation patterns involving super reach (or specific fluctuation patterns among them) are determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in set values (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do it. By doing so, the execution ratio differs only for the specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. In addition, conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

  In addition, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value, except for non-reach loss. The determination values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance between normal reach loss and super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), the ratio of the normal reach loss becomes significantly higher in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3” (this example). 5-6), specifically, in the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), the normal reach loss is set in the order of set values “1” <“2” <“3”. Is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

  The feature part 112IW can execute the setting suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value. This is because the execution rates of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different according to the set value. The concept includes that the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different, and that the execution ratio of only the normal reach loss is different according to the set value.

  In the characteristic part 112IW, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 regardless of which of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) is used. Then, the variable display of the effect design is performed. Further, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 to perform variable display of effect symbols. Note that the special background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

  Not limited to the example of the characteristic part 112IW, for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a setting value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display of the effect design is different from the normal one, and the setting value is 1 or 2) May be selected), so that the special variation pattern can be selected only during the special period. With such a structure as well, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a special period, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Non-reach lost variation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table. In this feature part 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach-miss variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach-loss, the non-reach-loss variation A to C is further determined. Is configured. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 is configured to include the non-reach loss A to C, and any of the non-reach loss A to C, the normal reach loss, and the super reach loss. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

  As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the non-reach-haze variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach-missing C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the setting value is "2". If the set value is “3”, the rate determined as non-reach miss B (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Is assigned a judgment value.

  In the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, and thus the variation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, and therefore the variation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In the characteristic part 112IW, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1”. It is also configured such that the average variation time becomes longer in the order of “<“ 2 ”<“ 3 ”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed and the gambling probability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

  In the feature part 112IW, the average variation time is configured to be different by varying the proportion of the non-reach loses A to C having different variation times according to the set value. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) so that the variation time is different, and the selection ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when a plurality of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, by varying the time of the effect symbol shaking display or high-speed variation display, the effect of production etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in how they look.

  In addition, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the average variation time is configured to be different depending on the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, according to the set value, the final effect design (final The period in which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the fixed effect symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the proportion of which of the non-reach loses A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the big hit is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration but is set for each set value. The fixed time may be fixed, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is higher.

  The characteristic part 112IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening that has a shorter variation time than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time of 1.5 seconds) is provided that is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time of 9 seconds). Then, this shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is in a state close to the upper limit, this state is canceled and variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is intended. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the feature unit 112IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or larger than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Note that, regardless of the configuration of the characteristic part 112IW, the fluctuation time pattern for shortening used when the number of held storages is equal to or larger than the predetermined number may be changed according to the set value.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In the feature section 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (big winning opening, second winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform totaling and to calculate various winning information such as continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base by the totaling.

  Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 includes a 4-digit display unit. The display portion of each digit is made up of 7 segments, each of which is composed of 7 segments that draw the shape of "8", and dots arranged at the lower right side of the 7 segments.

  The display contents are displayed on the first digit display part and the second digit display part, and the numerical values are displayed in percentage on the third digit display part and the fourth digit display part. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the last 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. To be done.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated independently of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the proportion of the total number of prize balls, which is the number of prize balls due to winning at the second start winning port in the high base state and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large winning port in the jackpot gaming state. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed in the first digit display and the second-digit display, and when the short-term ratio of display No2 is displayed, “Y7.” Is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display part and the fourth digit display part. When is displayed, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion.

  When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the first digit display part and the second digit display part, and when the total cumulative ratio of display no. 4 is displayed. "A7." Is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. When the total cumulative proportion of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative proportion is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the third digit display section and the fourth digit display section, and the total cumulative proportion of display No. 4 is displayed. When the cumulative combination ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion.

  When the display No. 5 base 1 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the first digit display unit and the second digit display unit, and when the display No. 4 base 2 is displayed, one digit is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the eye display and the second digit display. When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion.

  Furthermore, the display of these short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 is based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, and the set values set at that time. It is possible to sequentially change the display to the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning percentage, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning percentage, the base 1, and the base 2.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The monitor 112IW029 may be capable of displaying only one numerical value or only two numerical values out of these continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 112IW, a form in which the consecutive ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, is calculated, and the consecutive ratio, the winning ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded prize balls may be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 without calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Good.

(Setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 112IW will be described. 20-8 and 20-9 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 112IW. In the characteristic part 112IW, the processes of steps IWS001 and S002 are the same as the processes of steps S1 and S2 shown in FIG.

  When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the production control means for measuring the time until the production control means (specifically, the production control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means start waiting timer is set to a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the game machine until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the production control means start waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the processing after step 112IWS006 is executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the setting value change and confirmation, the RAM initialization and restoration processing, etc. are executed. To be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a command for restoration, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 103, for example, sets a factory-shipped setting flag in the RAM 102, which indicates that the factory-shipped settings are left as they are (for example, this flag is cleared even when RAM clearing processes 1 and 2 and a recovery process described later are executed. Is set, and is cleared when the setting change processing to be described later is executed) is set, and in step 112IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not the factory setting flag is set. do it. Note that, without being limited to such an aspect, for example, a value indicating that the value is the same as that at the time of factory shipment (for example, “0” or “−”) is set, and the value of the set value is set in step 112IWS006. It may be possible to confirm whether or not is the value at the time of factory shipment. If the settings are the same as the factory settings (step 112 IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is saved (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the data check of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same processing as step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 112IWS008). In step 112IWS008, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting change flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting change flag is set (step 112IWS009; No), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to power failure or the like during the change of the set value, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). It should be noted that the CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, a display of “E”) indicating that there is a RAM error on the display monitor 112IW029.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 112IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the areas other than the area for storing the performance display information such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the performance ratios, the combination ratio, and the base, etc. Information is not cleared but retained. In addition, in the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS027.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is OFF (N in step 112IWS011), the setting key 112IW051 is OFF (N in step 112IWS012), and the output signal from the clear switch is OFF ( In N) of step 112IWS013, the process does not proceed to step 112IWS014 but proceeds to loop processing.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S014, in the characteristic unit 112IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in step 112IWS007, S008), the setting for factory shipment is still left (step 112IWS006 Y), if an electric power interruption or the like occurs during the setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. The RAM is cleared on the condition that it is possible to change the set value after step 112IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

  If the setting change flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017). If the setting key 112IW051 is turned on, the CPU 103 sends a setting confirmation processing start command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS018). On the production control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation processing start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Sound is emitted or a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

  When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped, by the same process as step S6. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 sends a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS016) or the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same process as step S6. Thus, a restoration process (step 112IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped is performed. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Further, the CPU 103 transmits the effect control command instructing the recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 by the same processing as step S7 (step 112IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is ON, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 112IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the serial ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the serial ratio and Information for performance display such as winning ratio, base, etc., and setting value information are not cleared and retained.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON (step 112IWS025). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS026). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag (step 112IWS027).

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change processing start command indicating that the setting change processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS028). On the production control board 12 side, when the setting change processing start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Sound is emitted or a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

  When the setting change process is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting change flag (step 112IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). In addition, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

  On the other hand, if the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS025) or the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same process as step S9. Thus, an effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

  Note that the processing of steps IWS034 to S036 in the characteristic unit 112IW is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

  Next, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019) will be described. FIG. 20-10 (A) is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

  In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSA01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSA02). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSA02, and the processes of steps 112IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open and the setting key 112IW051 is on.

  If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting confirmation error processing (step 112IWSA04). Then, after that, the processing shifts to loop processing. In addition, in step 112IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that there is a setting confirmation error, and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the command being received by the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting confirmation error process is executed, the process shifts to the loop process, and thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the process does not proceed.

  If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA05). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process is ended.

  Next, the setting change process (step 112IWS029) will be described. FIG. 20-10 (B) is a flowchart showing the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

  In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (step 112IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (Y in step 112IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB03). For example, when "1" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display of the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to "2", and "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029. Updates the display on the display monitor 112IW029 to "3", and when "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to "1". Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates and stores the set value already stored) (step 112IWSB04).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWSB05). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB02, and the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed.

  If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting change error processing (step 112IWSB07). Then, after that, the processing shifts to loop processing. In step 112IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that there is a setting change error, and executes the setting change error notification based on the command received on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error process is executed, the process shifts to the loop process, and thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the process is prevented from proceeding. In this case, since the setting change flag remains set in step 112IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (see Y in step 112IWS009, 112IWS014), The error condition will be released.

  If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB08). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process of step 112IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

  Note that the specified setting value may be displayed on the image display device 5 in step 112IWSA01 of the setting confirmation processing. Further, in 112IWSB01 of the setting change process, the specified setting value may be displayed on the image display device 5. Then, the subsequent processing may be executed using the image display device 5.

  Further, during execution of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process shown in FIG. 20-10, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are not displayed in the normal game (for example, all segments of the 7-segment LED are turned on or blinked). Mode). In this way, by using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B to notify, the player can be suitably notified of the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may have different modes in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

  If the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change process shown in FIG. 20-10, the setting change process is executed again and the updated set value is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM). An error may be generated unless the setting change is completed by. Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, the setting change flag (which is not erased even if the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM that stores the setting value, and the setting change is completed at the end of the setting change process. When the flag is turned off and the process other than the setting change process (for example, the game control main process) is executed and the setting change flag is on, an error occurs. As described above, in a situation in which the setting change process does not normally proceed on the way, the clerk at the game hall may mistakenly think that the setting change has been completed even though the setting change has not been completed. In such a case, by making an error if the setting change is not completed, it is possible to ensure the reliable completion of the setting change.

  Further, in step 112IWSA01 and step 112IWSB01 of FIG. 20-10, the current setting value is read from the backup RAM and the setting value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not normally performed, the information indicating the error is displayed on the image display device 5, and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are set differently from those in the normal game. (For example, all segments of the 7-segment LED may be turned off, and if all lights are on during the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, all blinks may be performed).

  FIG. 20-11 is an explanatory diagram of a process that is executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 20-11, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (steps 112IWS005 to S010) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (steps 112IWS015 to S017) is executed. When the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. Executed.

  Next, a display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (A) and 20-12 (B), when the power is turned off (power is cut off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. In addition, at the timing of turning off the power, when the big winning opening such as a big hit game is being opened, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (C), when a clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 under the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

  In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by the store clerk or the like in the game arcade. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (E), the CPU 103 sets the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the RAM 102 based on the setting key 112IW051 being turned OFF by the operation of the store clerk or the like in the game arcade. Stored in the backup area of (update memory). At this time, the CPU 103, on the display monitor 112IW029, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, for the set value set at that time. Display base 1 and base 2. Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. If the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-12 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the special winning opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state in which the game can be played, that is, a variation display result, a jackpot type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 20-12 (F), the CPU 103 displays “EEEE” on the display monitor 112IW029 based on the occurrence of an error in the RAM 102 that stores the set value. It is possible to

  In the setting change process in the characteristic unit 112IW, an example in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value that is most unfavorable to the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic portion 112IW), or most advantageous to the player You may make it display a setting value ("3" in case of this characteristic part 112IW).

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, the process of the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the present feature part 112IW will be described. 20-13 and 20-14 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) (step 112IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step 112IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second pending storage number counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 112IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 112IWS104).

  By performing the processing of steps 112IWS102 to S104, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol in this feature unit 112IW. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, according to the order of starting winnings in which the game balls win the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute and.

  Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 112IWS105). Specifically, the CPU 103, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved memories = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. The data is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 112IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the storage area of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, the CPU 103, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 and the order.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step 112IWS107). The CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS108). As described above, in the characteristic part 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 112 IWS011. The setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of 112 IWS 108.

  Even if the same variation pattern is used, if different variation pattern commands are transmitted for each setting value, variation pattern commands for the total number of variation patterns × the number of setting values (3 in this example) are required. Therefore, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, the set value command may be transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern commands corresponding to the specific variation pattern may be provided with the variation pattern commands for the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are changed pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. May be provided.

  In this example, the same set value command is sent for the set value command (see step 112IWS011) sent when the power is turned on and the set value command (see step 112IWS108) sent when the fluctuation starts. It is not limited to various forms. For example, the set value command for power-on and the set value command for start of fluctuation may be configured as separate commands, and different set value commands may be transmitted at power-on and at the start of fluctuation. Good.

  Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. Good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted when the set value is “3”.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and depending on which setting value is set on the effect control CPU 120 side. It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the fluctuation pattern A-2 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-2 is high. The variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a rate, or if the setting value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 may have the same variation time, but may be configured to have different presence / absence of pseudo stations, number of pseudo stations, presence / absence of reach, and type. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio The variation pattern may be selected with.

  Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation, for example.

  Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 112IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designating command in the case of the probability variation state, and controls to transmit a time saving state background designation command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background designation command.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 20-4) with the random number value MR1 and determining that the jackpot is determined when they match. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination process.

  If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step 112IWS110), the process proceeds to step 112IWS116.

  When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is the jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 20-5) to identify the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A , "Big hit type B" or "big hit type C") is determined as a big hit type (step 112IWS114).

  Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS115). For example, when the big hit type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (step 112IWS116). For example, when the big hit flag is not set, “-” which is the deviating symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, "7" which is a big hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to a big hit type.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 112IWS117).

(Production mode change processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the characteristic unit 112IW will be described. FIG. 20-15 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 112IW. In the feature control unit 112IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control random number updating process of step S77 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change process of changing the effect mode (step 112IWS201), and thereafter. It returns to the process of step S73.

  In the present feature portion 112IW, it is possible to control in three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the notice production and reach production are different. In the effect mode change process of step 112IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the performance control board 12, the performance mode may be changed based on the fact that a predetermined day or time has been reached based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, the lottery process based on a random number may be executed to change the effect mode based on the decision to change the effect mode.

  In step 112IWS201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, the flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change may be set and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when changing to the effect mode A, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the mode is changed to the effect mode B, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode C is changed, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

  The way of changing the effect mode may be changed in a predetermined order, such as effect mode A, effect mode B, effect mode C, effect mode A, ... You may make it change at random from modes A-C.

  (Command analysis process)

  FIG. 20-16 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 112IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 112IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 112IWS303). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

  If the received effect control command is the set value command (step 112IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 112 IWS305). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power of the gaming machine is turned on (step 112IWS306).

  In this characteristic unit 112IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power supply, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are supplied to the gaming machine by the power supply. Cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the processing is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. It Since the effect control board 12 is activated in a state where the setting value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the setting value command even when the setting confirmation processing or the restoration processing is executed. The configuration may be configured such that the set value command is always transmitted when the power is turned on.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change process is performed. However, the set value command is normally transmitted due to missing of the command or garbled data. If not received, the process of step 112IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the feature section 112IW sends the set value command for each variable display. Therefore, the process of step 112IWS305 is performed based on the received set value command. It can be executed so that the set value is stored in the set value storage area.

  Further, even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the set value command is read on the side of the production control CPU 120, the set value command is changed to the set value command. It may be configured to determine whether the included setting value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of "1" to "3", but includes a value such as "5" or "10" that should not be set. If it is set, it may be configured to determine that the set value included in the set value command is abnormal. Moreover, for example, the CPU 120 for effect control stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command, and when a new setting value command is received thereafter, the setting value command newly received is used. If the set value shown does not match the previously stored set value, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred and an abnormality may be determined. Then, even when it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been normally received, and the effect is limited according to the processing method shown in the feature unit 112IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial result setting)
In the characteristic part 112IW, when one of the initialization designation command, the restoration command, the setting change processing end command, and the setting confirmation processing end command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis processing on the production control board 12 side. In the image display device 5, control for displaying a predetermined initial result (specifically, a combination of effect symbols, which is displayed in the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) is performed. Perform (hereinafter also referred to as the initial appearance).

  If the received effect control command is the setting change processing end command (step 112IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS308). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value that is set, by using the initial outcome determination table, even initial appearance numbers (for example, “246” and “224” etc.), which are combinations of even production symbols, and odd production symbols, It is determined to be one of an odd initial number (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial number that is a combination of effect symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 112IWS309). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

  FIG. 20-17 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the initial result determination table. In step 112IWS309, using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 20-17 (A), a lottery process based on a random number is performed in accordance with the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, and the initial value is determined. Determine the outcome. In the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. 20-17 (A), the odds of initial outcomes are determined to be higher in the order of set values “1” <“2” <“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the start of the game, if the odd initial number is displayed, it means that the setting has been changed, and an advantageous setting value compared to the case where the even initial number is displayed. Will be suggested to be set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-17 (A), the special initial appearance may be decided only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the game is started, it is determined that the setting has been changed and the setting value is “3”. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made interested, and the motivation for playing the game can be given from an early period of the business hours of the game store, and the interest can be enhanced.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS310). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value is “1” and determines the initial result using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 20-17 (A) (step 112IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS310 to S311, the characteristic unit 112IW is the most unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. The initial result is determined to be "1". As shown in FIG. 20-17 (A), with respect to the set value “1”, the odds of being decided as the initial odd number are the lowest, and there is no case where it is decided as the special initial number. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the player is discouraged by displaying an odd-numbered initial result or a special initial result even if a disadvantageous set value is set, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS312). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the initial effect determination table for effect mode C to determine the initial result (step 112IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

  FIG. 20-17 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial result determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-17 (B), in the initial result determination table for effect mode C, it is determined as an odd initial result as compared with the case of the setting value “3” that is most advantageous for the player. The percentage is low, and there is no case where it is decided to be a special initial result.

  By executing the processes of steps 112IWS312 to S313, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C. In spite of the fact that odd initial numbers and special initial numbers are displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial result determined in steps 112IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 112IWS314).

  On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result to be an even-numbered initial result and the image display device 5 In step 1, control is performed to display an even-numbered initial result (step 112IWS315).

  By executing the process of step 112IWS315, the present characteristic part 112IW uniformly displays the even initial numbers when the set value command is not normally received and the production mode is B. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by displaying an odd initial number or a special initial number despite being set to an unfavorable set value, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

  Even if the setting value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd initial winning symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the determination rate of the odd-numbered initial-drawing symbols is set lower than the setting value "1" of the initial-numbering determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

  In this example, the case where the set value command is not normally received and the even initial number is uniformly displayed in the production mode B is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B, when the set value command cannot be received normally, such as the combination of the symbols "????" as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial result. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest the set value in any form may be displayed as the initial result.

  Further, the processing when the set value command is not successfully received (or when the set value is not normally stored) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when it is determined as N in step 112IWS308, the setting value “1” may be stored in the setting value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. In addition, for example, a setting value dedicated for indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally (for example, setting value “4”) is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial result. Good.

  If the received production control command is any of the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, and the setting confirmation processing end command (step 112IWS316), that is, if the setting change processing has not been executed, the production control CPU 120 , The initial number is determined to be an even number, and the image display device 5 controls to display an even number of initial numbers (step 112IWS317). In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial outcome is determined to be an even initial outcome, and is not determined to be an odd initial outcome. It may be determined to be either an eye or an odd initial roll. In this case, the proportion determined according to the set value may be different.

  If the received production control command is a RAM abnormality error notification command (step 112IWS318), the production control CPU 120 executes RAM error notification (step 112IWS319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as "A RAM error abnormality has occurred" on the image display device 5, or outputs a voice or an error sound indicating the RAM error abnormality from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality is notified, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs a maximum volume voice or an error sound, or the game effect lamp 9 or the LED emits the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED). It is desirable to emit white light.

  If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 112IWS320). For example, if the received production control command is a variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is stored in the variation pattern command storage area provided in the RAM 122, and the variation pattern command reception flag is set. Further, for example, if the received effect control command is a display result designation command, the received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area provided in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS301.

  Note that the characteristic part 112IW is configured so that the odd-numbered initial results are not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, but the odd-numbered initial results may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the odd number initial odds may be determined differently according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

  Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd-numbered initial number and even-numbered initial number, an initial number that deny the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied, A value 2 or a set value 3 is confirmed), an initial result that a specific set value is confirmed, or the like may be provided and displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, when the specific initial result is displayed by not determining the specific initial result, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied, and the set value 2 or It is decided that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting the specific initial result to be determined only in the case of the setting value 3, when the specific initial result is displayed, it is confirmed that the setting value is 3. .. Further, when determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the proportion determined according to the set value may be different.

(Directed setting suggestion)
In the present characteristic part 112IW, the set value is configured to be changeable, and as a setting suggestive effect suggesting the set value, a pre-game suggestive effect executed before the game starts, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, during the game (for example, , A suggestion during a game that is executed during the variation display of the effect pattern, a setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the variation pattern described above, and a suggestion during a big hit that is executed during a big hit (for example, during a big hit game) Has been done. It should be noted that, in the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of kinds of effect modes each having a different suggestion reliability. The reliability of suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of suggestion may be higher in the order of pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game, or pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect during big hit. The reliability of suggestion may be higher in the order of suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect before game, or suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect before game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion production can be set. For example, the manager of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect or an initial appearance effect in which setting change is suggested), or an execution rate. The setting may be changed to lower (or increase). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operating means such as the push button 31B or the operating means such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine (only the administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Variable display start wait processing)
20-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 sets a fluctuation start command reception flag (for example, a fluctuation pattern command reception flag) indicating that a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step 112 IWS401).

  When the fluctuation start command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the customer waiting demonstration effect if it is in progress (step 112IWS402, step 112IWS403). Then, the fluctuation start command reception flag is reset (step 112IWS404), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 112IWS405), and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  If the variation start command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the result of timing by the timing means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (N in step 112IWS406). It is confirmed (step 112 IWS407). In step 112IWS407, for example, when the timer (for example, set to 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “miss”) ends, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Also, when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the variable display has not been executed even once and before the game starts), it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. In other words, if the variable display is not executed for a predetermined period of time (and is not controlled to the big hit game state) or before the game is started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the process described later. Will be executed.

  If the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 112IWS408). That is, in step 112IWS408, it is confirmed whether the game is not started yet.

  If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS409). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM122, Using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestive effect is executed (step 112IWS410). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

  In the characteristic part 112IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp becomes the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestive effect of the second effect mode is controlled, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestive effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

  FIG. 20-19 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table. In step 112IWS410, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), a lottery process based on a random number is performed in accordance with the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, Whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined. In the pre-game suggestive effect determination table of FIG. 20-19 (A), determination values are assigned in order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” so that the pre-game suggestive effect is executed at a higher rate. Has been. In addition, the determination value is assigned such that the proportion determined in the second effect mode becomes higher in the order of set values “1” <“2” <“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and that the advantageous setting value is set by being executed in the second effect mode rather than in the first effect mode. Become. Further, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is "3". Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS411). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value is “1” and uses the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. And the effect mode is determined (step 112IWS412). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS411 to S412, the present feature section 112IW is the most unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), with respect to the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and there is no case where it is determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS413). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 112IWS414). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

  FIG. 20-19 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (B), in the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestive effect as compared with the case of the setting values “2” and “3”. The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the case is not determined as the third effect mode.

  By executing the processes of steps 112IWS413 to S414, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable set value in the case where the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 112IWS410, S412, and S414 (step 112IWS415). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 112IWS416. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

  By executing the process of step 112IWS413, in the present feature unit 112IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, the pre-game suggestion production is not executed, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed to disappoint the player despite the disadvantageous set value being set, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect.

  Note that the ratio is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 20-19 (A), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes may be executed at different rates depending on the set value. You can

  In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) so that the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the setting is performed. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is confirmed. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

  In the characteristic part 112IW, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestive effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode according to the set value. (Including 3 effect modes), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode differ according to the set value, and only the specific effect mode according to the set value. This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

  It should be noted that the characteristic part 112IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect when the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable even when the setting is not changed. In this case, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode when executing the effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

  For example, FIG. 20-19 (C) is a pre-game suggestive effect determination table used when a command for restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A) and the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change When not performed, the pre-game suggestive effect is executed at a lower rate and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is smaller than when the setting is changed. By doing so, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestive effect can be made different between when the setting is changed and when the setting is not changed.

  If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 112IWS416). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

  When the process of step 112IWS416 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history showing the number of executions of the setting suggestive effect (in-game suggestive effect and big hit suggestive effect), execution content (effect mode at the time of execution), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. Note that when the process of step 112IWS416 is executed, the customer waiting de-effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, The image display device 5 may display execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of executions and execution content (effect mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (initial hit effect effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, etc.) is shown. It is also possible to store the information and execute the effect of inferring the set value from the information and notifying the set value. It should be noted that this effect is to notify the expected setting value (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined reference from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, not to notify the actual setting value. ..

  In the feature part 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 112IWS408 to 112IWS415. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is shown during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the process of step 112IWS416, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and the interest can be increased. .. Not limited to the example of the characteristic unit 112IW, for example, by using a real-time clock or the like, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). Good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestive effect may not include information about the suggesting effect during game in the special period.

  In addition to the configuration of the characteristic part 112IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect is accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game or the like. It may be configured to do so. In addition, when a player uses a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on a gaming machine and sends it to a web server on the Internet, the web server is based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. The player may access the Web server using the mobile terminal (or analyze the two-dimensional code) to acquire the execution history information and display the execution history information on the display device included in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may use a mobile terminal to read a two-dimensional code including the execution history information, so that a setting suggestive image suggesting a set value may be displayed on a display device included in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value that is estimated based on a predetermined reference is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image that suggests the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be.

(During game suggestion production decision processing)
FIG. 20-20 is a flowchart showing an example of a game suggestive effect determination process. The game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the game suggested effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 selects the first in-game suggested effect determination table when the special period is in effect (Y in step 112IWS501) (step 112IWS502), and is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 112IWS501), the second in-game suggestive effect determination table is selected (step 112IWS503). For example, when the setting change end command or the setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag may be reset. For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 112IWS501 whether it is during the special period.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS504). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM122, Using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence / absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined (step 112IWS505).

  20-21 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestive effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 20-21 (B) is a second in-game suggestive effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

  In the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion during game is executed, so that it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set.

  As for the second effect mode (appearance of the mini characters A and B), the ratio of being executed in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of the mini character A). The determination value is assigned so that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than that of the set value. That is, the second effect mode has a higher degree of reliability with respect to the setting value being more advantageous than the first effect mode.

  In the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect having a high reliability is executed only during the special period. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance interest.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B), the third effect mode (character C appears) may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is decided that the setting value is "3".

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS506). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode by using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table as the setting value “1” ( Step 112 IWS507).

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS506 to S507, the present characteristic unit 112IW is the most disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the rate itself for deciding to execute the in-game suggestion effect is low, and the rate is determined as the second effect mode. Is the lowest, and is not determined to be the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion during game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS508). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine the presence or absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 112IWS509).

  FIG. 20-21 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-21 (C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the proportion determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the setting value “3”. There is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS508 to S509, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the in-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly ends the process. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

  By executing the processing of step 112IWS508, the present feature unit 112IW does not execute the in-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the suggestion during game is executed to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the in-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the in-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of in-game suggestive effect.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

  In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) so that the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the setting is performed. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is confirmed. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

  In the feature part 112IW, it is possible to execute the suggestion during game at different rates according to the set value, but this is the suggestion during game according to the set value (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode). (Including 3 effect modes), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode differ according to the set value, and only the specific effect mode according to the set value. This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, in the special period and the non-special period, it is configured to be able to execute the in-game suggestion effect in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode), but it is not limited to such a configuration. Alternatively, the in-game suggestion effect in a different mode may be executable. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

  In addition, in the present characteristic unit 112IW, whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when it is executed are configured to be different depending on whether it is the special period or the non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of the pseudo continuous effect, and the display result become a big hit. Depending on whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, the effect mode when executing may be different.

  For example, the in-game suggestion effect may be executable only when the change pattern includes at least the reach effect (that is, the change time is longer than that of the non-reach change pattern). Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the super reach B and the variation pattern including the super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than the super reach B, the latter is configured so that the in-game suggestive effect is executed at a higher rate. Alternatively, the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed is high, and the reliability when the in-game suggestive effect is executed is high. It may be higher.

  In addition, for example, in a variation pattern including a pseudo-relational effect and a variation pattern that does not include a pseudo-relational effect (or the number of pseudo-repetition times is smaller than the former), the former has a higher percentage of execution of the suggestion during game. It may be set higher, the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be higher, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed becomes higher and The reliability may be increased.

  Further, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and in the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may be configured to have a higher ratio in which the suggestive effect during game is executed. The reliability when the medium suggestive effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestive effect is executed may be increased, and the reliability when the intermediate suggestive effect is executed may be increased. ..

(Direction determination process during big hit)
20-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit mid-game effect determination process. The big hit mid-game effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit mid-game effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS601). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Whether or not the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 112IWS602). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

  In step S112IWS602, if the period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the process shown in FIG. When one big hit medium suggestive effect determination table is selected, and when it is not during the specific period, the second big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence / absence of execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but it is not limited to this, and for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the last game. It may be the time when the display is started or the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the period from the start of the game to the variable display being executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as the specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game to the variable display being executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and a first specific period (a period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed 50 times) and a second specific period (the 51st change after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a big hit medium suggestive effect determination table in which the presence or absence of the big hit medium suggestive effect and the determination ratio of the effect mode are different between the display and the 100th variation display).

  20-23 (A), (B), in the first and second big hit medium suggestive effect determination table, the big hit medium suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting value "1" <"2" <"3". The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, so that it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set.

  Further, in the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period is high. The determination value is assigned so that the difference between the two becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect having higher reliability than the non-specific period is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game in a specific period, and to enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the characteristic part 112IW, the big hit medium suggestion effect (or a particular effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and not in a non-specific period.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed in the fourth effect mode, so that it is determined that the setting value is “3”.

  In the present feature part 112IW, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (A1), the effect pattern which is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (B1), the dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 112IW102 is displayed.

  Further, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (A1), after the effect pattern to be a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, the figure is displayed. As shown in 20-25 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 112IW105 is displayed.

  If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS603). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the setting is “1”, and uses the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table to determine whether or not to execute the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode ( Step 112 IWS 604). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS603 to S604, in the characteristic unit 112IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode A is set. Whether or not the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed and the effect mode is determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B), the setting value “1” has the lowest ratio of the second effect mode and the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the disadvantageous set value being set, the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player instead. It is possible to prevent the situation that the game is lost and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS605). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestion during big hit and the effect mode by using the big hit midpoint suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C (step 112IWS606). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

  20-23 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-23 (C), in the big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the rate itself for determining the big hit medium suggestion effect is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. Compared with, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and there is no case where it is determined as the fourth effect mode.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS605 to S606, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable set value in the case where the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. Despite that, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode and the player is rather discouraged, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

  On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 112IWS607. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is limited so as not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  By executing the process of step 112IWS605, the present characteristic part 112IW does not execute the big hit medium suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and is in the effect mode B. Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a suggestion during a big hit is executed to disappoint the player, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be configured to be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit medium suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect during the big hit.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), when a big hit occurs in a specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. May be. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be changed according to the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20-23 (B), regardless of the set value, the proportion in which the suggestion during big hit is not executed is configured to be the same, but if the proportion not executed is different depending on the set value. You may allow it.

  In addition, in the present feature part 112IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, a big hit medium suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, The setting suggestion effect (for example, a dialogue image suggesting the set value is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied) may be executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition in the specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, or a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is executed.

  The present feature portion 112IW can execute a big hit mid-game suggestion effect at different rates depending on the set value, but this is a big hit mid-game suggestive effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect mode). (Including the production mode and the fourth production mode), the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, the third production mode, and the fourth production mode are different according to the set value, and the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, a third effect mode) according to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 112IWS607).

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (A1), the movable member 112IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, control for moving the movable member 112IW101 to the front surface of the image display device 5 is performed as shown in FIG. 20-24 (B2).

  As shown in FIGS. 20-24 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is performed, the movable member 112IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 produces an effect during the big hit. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the serif image is displayed. In the present feature portion 112IW, the effect during the big hit and the character effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the big hit game, so that the movable member 112IW101 that has actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is the big hit. The serif image displayed by the medium suggestion effect is not covered. However, during the fanfare period, if the movable member 112IW101 operates due to the effect production, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 112IW101 and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion production may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 112IWS607, the character effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (D) is used so that the character effect is not executed when the big hit suggestion effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestive effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize and reduce the interest. Further, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the big hit mid-hugging suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize even if the big hit mid-hit suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing.

  In addition, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the big hit medium effect indication is performed. It may be performed during the ending period) to prevent the suggestive effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 112IW101 is changed (for example, control is performed so that the movable member 112IW101 does not stop at a position overlapping the serif image by the big hit medium suggestion effect), or the big hit. The display position of the serif image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is determined, the execution rate of the accessory effect may be reduced to limit the execution of the accessory effect. Further, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 20 to 23D, the character effect may be executed at a low rate even when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed.

  Next, when the character effect is not executed (N in step 112IWS608), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 112IWS609).

  Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, a light-transmitting light guide plate 112IW103 capable of transmitting light and a light-emitting body provided so that light can be incident from an end surface of the light guide plate are provided. It is assumed that a light emitting member is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate 112IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 112IW103 and emits it to the front surface of the game machine. Then, by causing the light emitting body to emit light, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect in which light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the game machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the game machine, and the “big hit” is achieved. Appears. In addition, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the light guide plate effect.

  In step 112IWS609, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (E), light guide plate effects are executed at different ratios according to the presence or absence of the big hit suggestive effect and the effect mode when it is executed. It Specifically, when the suggestion during big hit in the first effect mode is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the suggestion during big hit in the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode. When the effect is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate effect executed is reduced. That is, when the big hit medium suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate effect being executed is high, and the big hit medium suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (B4), when the dialogue A image (“setting is ...”) 112IW104 is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect of the first effect mode, the light guide plate effect is executed. If so, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amusement of the game due to the suggestion during the big hit which is an undesirable effect for the player. When the big hit medium suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate. The effect may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestive effect during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

  In the feature section 112IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed prior to the big hit suggestive effect (or pre-game suggestive effect or in-game suggestive effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. In the case where a predetermined effect that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit medium suggestion effect (for example, a particular effect mode of the fanfare effect) is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit medium suggestion effect In addition, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be prioritized. Specifically, in the case where the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect makes it difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect, the image is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect. The images may be preferentially displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 112IW, the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the effect symbol is variably displayed by driving the drum-shaped movable body having the effect symbol on the surface. (In other words, it may be applied to a so-called drum type game machine). Alternatively, the effect symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body on the surface of which the effect symbol is arranged (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type gaming machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal operation at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting change (or the characteristic). Behavior may occur). Therefore, in the first variation after the setting is changed, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the variation may be executed (or the execution rate may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are configured to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be lowered at a high rate when the player gives an undesired suggestion. For example, when an even-numbered initial result is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestive effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility is reduced. As described above, the ratio of performing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate may be increased. In addition, not only the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, but also effects including a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control for causing a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED to emit light in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to another person, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or made less noticeable).

  In addition to the setting suggestion effect of the characteristic part 112IW, the simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer or the real-time clock set when the power is turned on) is executed in a specific mode. The setting may be suggested by.

  In addition, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting according to the number of times the variable display is continuously executed without the reserved memory becoming 0, or the number of starting winnings exceeding the upper limit reserved memory occurs (for example, a predetermined image). Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be performed.

  In addition, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during a predetermined operation valid period (for example, display control of a predetermined image or output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control). (Emission control of the lamp is performed) may be performed.

  The characteristic part 112IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

As described above, the characteristic portion 112IW includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after a change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command is transmitted. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that wrong suggestive performance may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in game control microcomputer 100) 112 IWS005 to S010)),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS011, S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) CPU 112, which executes steps 112IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and S601 to S606).
If the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of course, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the steps 112IWS412, S507, and S604).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the step 112IWS011, S108 to transmit the set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the first invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, and big hit suggestive effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined. A suggestion effect determination means for determining (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 112IWS410, S412, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606) is provided.
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined by using the decision data corresponding to the set value set among the plural kinds of decision data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122). Based on the set value that is set, execute steps 112 IWS410, S505, and S602),
When the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Executes steps 112IWS412, S507, S604 based on the setting value "1")
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent an increase in data capacity.

  In addition, in this feature part 112IW, "deciding the execution mode of suggestive effect" is a concept including determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestive effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect, etc.) depending on the set value that is set during the period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed. It may be possible to execute an initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time period. The motivation to do this can be given and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 6 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), and FIGS. 20-21 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B)),
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the suggested effect that has been executed may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 8 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-23 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 9 of the first invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, and the like. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the first invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) varies depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 11 of the first invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

The characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following second invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after a change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command is transmitted. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that wrong suggestive performance may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in game control microcomputer 100) 112 IWS005 to S010)),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS011, S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) CPU 112, which executes steps 112IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and S601 to S606).
The suggestion effect executing means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets N in step 112IWS413, S508). When N in S, S605, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect are not executed)
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the step 112IWS011, S108 to transmit the set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect, etc.) depending on the set value that is set during the period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed. It may be possible to execute an initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time period. The motivation to do this can be given and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), and FIGS. 20-21 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B)),
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the suggested effect that has been executed may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the second invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-23 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 8 of the second invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, and the like. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 9 of the second invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) varies depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the second invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

In addition, the characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after a change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command is transmitted. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that wrong suggestive performance may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) (for example, step in game control microcomputer 100) 112 IWS005 to S010)),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, the part that executes steps S114 to 117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS011, S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (eg, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) CPU 112, which executes steps 112IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and S601 to S606).
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, an in-game suggestive effect, a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to execute pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect without executing the first suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, By performing steps 112IWS414, S509, S606, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect or the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the step 112IWS011, S108 to transmit the set value command at power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, and big hit suggestive effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined. A suggestion effect determination means for determining (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 112IWS410, S412, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606) is provided.
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined by using the decision data corresponding to the set value set among the plural kinds of decision data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122). Based on the set value that is set, execute steps 112 IWS410, S505, and S602),
When the set value information is not normally input, using dedicated decision data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, in-game suggestive effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect determination table), The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the big hit suggestion effect determination table in step 112IWS414. , S509, S606 are executed)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect, etc.) depending on the set value that is set during the period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed. It may be possible to execute an initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time period. The motivation to do this can be given and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), and FIGS. 20-21 (A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B)),
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the suggested effect that has been executed may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-23 (D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the third invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. It is described that it is possible to further provide a hard-to-use feature effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, and the like. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the third invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) varies depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the third invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, it is comprised so that it can be changed into three types of production modes A-C, and when it is controlled by production mode A, when setting value information was not input normally, The suggestion effect is configured to be executable as a predetermined setting value having a low degree of advantage for the player (the above-described first invention configuration), and when the effect mode B is controlled, the setting value is set. When the information is not normally input, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggested effect (the above-described second invention), and when the effect mode C is controlled, the set value information is normally input. If not, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is configured to be executable as the suggestive effect (the above-described third invention configuration). I can't stop. For example, the control method of any one of the first invention to the third invention may be switched depending on the game state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not normally input, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect assuming that the preset value is set to have a low advantage for the player. In the configuration (configuration of the first invention described above), if the game state is a time saving state, if the setting value information is not normally input, the execution of the suggestive effect is limited (the second invention of the above). If the game state is a probability change state and the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect ( The above configuration of the third invention) may be performed.

  In addition, it is not necessary to configure the suggestive effect by all the control methods of the first to third inventions described above, and it is possible to configure the suggestive effect by using only one of the control methods. Good.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to missing or garbled data, the control method of the first invention to the third invention described above controls the execution of the suggestive effect. Although the effect is limited), the case is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the set value command is received, but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestive effect may be limited. In this case, for example, every time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received on the effect control means side is stored, and when a new setting value command is received thereafter, a new setting value command is newly stored. When the set value indicated by the set value command received in step 1 and the previously stored set value do not match, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and the suggestion effect is executed by the control method of the first invention to the third invention. You may make it control (limit suggestive production).

  Also, the way to make the game different for each of the set values "1" to "3" is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, if the set value is an odd number such as “1” or “3”, a series of villas (a big hit continuously occurring during a probability change state) is likely to occur and a series of villas occurs. It is configured so that there is a large difference from when it is difficult, and if the set value is an even number such as the set value "2", the susceptibility to the consecutive holidays is configured to be relatively constant and does not change. The suggestion effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be executable. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be received normally, the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the first invention to the third invention. It may be configured to perform (limit suggestive effects).

In addition, the present characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following fourth invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestion effect execution means, at least during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display, the suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect) at a different rate depending on the set value being set. It is described that the game machine is characterized by being able to execute (or initial result production, etc.). According to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time slot. It can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of production identification information (for example, production design),
The suggestive effect executing means, during the period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, suggestive effect in which different production identification information is displayed according to the set value that is set (for example, It is described that it is possible to execute the display of odd-numbered initial hits. According to such a configuration, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 20). As shown in -19 (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestive effect determination table having different determination values is used)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests the set value that has been set, after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher degree of reliability with respect to the suggested setting value than the suggestion effect, and such a configuration can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 4), the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the present characteristic part 112IW also includes the following fifth invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be effectively given and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), and FIGS. 20-21 (A), (B)).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and enhance amusement of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to different ratios when the set value is changed and when it is not changed (for example, FIG. 20-6 (A), ( B))),
It is described that the variable display execution means may be capable of executing variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when it is not changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to a different ratio when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B)),
The variable display execution means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect). 20-23 can be performed based on the fact that the notice effect has been executed, etc. (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect can be executed. (See A) and (B))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the characteristic portion 112IW also includes the sixth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that it is not possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is not possible to sufficiently raise the interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B)).
A gaming machine characterized in that it further includes a notifying means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the suggested effect that has been executed is described. According to this feature, In addition, it is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestive effect has been executed (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the information regarding the suggested effect that has been executed while the customer is not waiting for variable display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (for example, execution history information) relating to the executed suggestive effect,
Image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an imaging device;
It is described that a display unit (for example, the image display device 5) that displays the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the image capturing device may be provided. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the present characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following seventh invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize by other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. (See (D))
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
The limiting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, one of them is executed in the fanfare period and the other is ended. Change to run in period)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed. See FIG. 20-23 (D). )
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means executes the predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestive effect does not become difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 112IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal mode (for example, a big hit suggestion). Control so that it does not stop at the position where it overlaps the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect and the predetermined effect (for example, fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display unit (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display unit may display the display related to the suggestive performance in preference to the display related to the predetermined performance, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest. it can.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the characteristic portion 112IW also includes an eighth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that there is a possibility that the entertainment may be deteriorated by executing the setting suggesting effect which is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A setting suggestion executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)),
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. A game machine characterized by further providing a difficult character effect, a light guide effect, an error display, etc. is described. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, character effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 112IW101). According to such a configuration, The staging effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 112IW103) having a light transmitting property capable of transmitting light,
A light-emitting body provided so that light can enter from the end surface of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection unit that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is configured to be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the light emitting plate to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification for displaying an error. With such a configuration, the error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting value is set to the first set value (for example, suggestive presentation during big hit in the first presentation mode. See FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)). , A second setting suggestion that suggests that the player is set to a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value (for example, suggestion during big hit in the third effect mode. (See A) and (B)),
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (for example, see FIG. 20-23 (E)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eighth invention,
A setting suggestion setting means capable of setting an execution rate of setting suggestion is provided (for example, a setting screen is displayed after power-on, operation means such as a push button 31B, operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (management Can be operated only by the person) so that the setting related to the setting suggestion effect can be changed)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that variably displays identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed. Can be prevented from decreasing.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The ninth aspect of the invention described below is also included in the characteristic portion 112IW. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling is likely to be too high when the setting is high. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when it is set to the second set value than when it is set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 20-5 (A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
It is described that a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting the set value being set (for example, a suggestive effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in the advantageous state, With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the ninth invention,
Equipped with production execution means that can execute production,
The effect execution means is configured to be able to execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, interval effect, ending effect, etc.) regardless of the set value that is set in a predetermined control period in the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be set in advance according to the set value that is set, and with such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of controlling in a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can control one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value that has been set,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The characteristic portion 112IW also includes a tenth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling is likely to be too high when the setting is high. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 10th invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may differ depending on the set value that has been set.With such a configuration, gambling will become too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period regarding the variable display may be set in advance according to the set value that is set, and with such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Note that the structure shown by the characteristic part 112IW can be appropriately combined with the structure shown by other characteristic parts such as the characteristic part 31AK to form a gaming machine. For example, when the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the mid-hit suggestion effect shown by the characteristic portion 112IW are executed, a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the pre-game suggestion effect, the mid-hit suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect. At this time, the title corresponding to the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect may be configured to be notified in the same manner as the characteristic part 31AK.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 251F to the characteristic part 253F)
Next, the characteristic parts 251F to 253F will be described. The characteristic part 251F has a characteristic regarding the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the jackpot type B described later, and the characteristic part 252F and the characteristic part 253F have a characteristic regarding the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the jackpot type D described later.

(About specifications)
FIG. 21-1 is a diagram for explaining the specifications and the jackpot type table for each setting value. 21-1 (A) is a table showing specifications at each set value, FIG. 21-1 (B) is a first special symbol big hit type table A used in the characteristic part 251F, and FIG. 21-1 (C) is , First special symbol big hit type table B used in the characteristic units 252F, 253F, FIG. 21-1 (C) is a diagram showing a second special symbol big hit type table used in the characteristic units 251F to 253F.

  Here, in the characteristic portion 251F to the characteristic portion 253F, the first start winning port is provided in the path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball on the left side of the game area of the game board 2 (left hitting). The second starting winning opening is provided in a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area of the game board 2 (right hitting). Further, in the characteristic portion 251F to the characteristic portion 253F, a left strike is aimed at the first starting winning opening for starting the game of the first special symbol when the base is low, and the game of the second special symbol is started when the base is high. It is a game of right-handed striking for the second starting winning opening.

  Because of such playability, the table of FIG. 21-1 (B) is used for the left hitting and the table of FIG. 21-1 (D) is used for the right hitting for the characteristic portion 251F. Regarding the characteristic portions 252F and 253F, the table of FIG. 21-1 (C) is used when left-handed, and the table of FIG. 21-1 (D) is used when right-handed. It should be noted that the specifications of the setting values of the characteristic part 251F to the characteristic part 253F are common. The details of each table will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 21-1 (A), in setting 1, the jackpot probability at non-probability change is 1/319, the jackpot probability at probability change is 1/95, and the ST continuation rate is 65.29%. In setting 2, the jackpot probability at non-probability change is 1/280, the jackpot probability at probability change is 1/75, and the ST continuation rate is 73.87%. In setting 3, the jackpot probability at non-probability change is 1/250, the jackpot probability at probability change is 1/60, and the ST continuation rate is 81.37%. Here, the ST continuation rate indicates the probability that the ST state will continue. The ST state is a state in which the probability variation state is controlled after the big hit game state and the probability variation state continues until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed. In the characteristic parts 251F to 253F, ST continues 100 times after the big hit game state.

  By setting the data shown in FIG. 21-1 (A), in the case of setting 1, all of the jackpot probability at non-probability change, the jackpot probability at probability change, and the ST continuation rate are the lowest among the set values. There is. On the other hand, in the case of setting 3, all of the big hit probability at the time of non-probability change, the big hit probability at the time of probability change, and the ST continuation rate are the highest among the set values. Therefore, the relationship of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the set value may be further provided with a plurality of stages, for example, it may be provided so as to be advantageous to the player in the stages of 1 to 6.

  As shown in FIG. 21-1 (B), the first special symbol big hit type table A used in the feature section 251F includes three big hits, a big hit type A, a big hit type B, and a big hit type C. When it becomes a big hit by the first special symbol, it is determined using this table that any one of these three big hits.

  In the jackpot type A, the variation in which the gaming state after the jackpot is a highly accurate and high base continues for 100 times of variable display, and the determination rate is 45%. In the jackpot type B, the gaming state after the jackpot becomes a highly accurate base. In the big hit B, the number of times of high base differs depending on the game state before the big hit. Specifically, when the low-accuracy low base or the high-accuracy low base causes a big hit B, the high-accuracy high base continues 50 times, and then the high-accuracy low base continues 50 times. When the high accuracy base is changed to the big hit B, the high accuracy base is continued 100 times. The determination ratio of the jackpot B is 20%. Further, in the jackpot type C, the variation in which the gaming state after the jackpot is a low probability base continues 100 times, and the determination rate is 35%. It can be said that the ST state is after the big hit A and the big hit B in which the high probability continues for a predetermined number of times.

  As shown in FIG. 21-1 (C), the first special symbol jackpot type table B used in the characteristic portions 252F, 253F includes three jackpots, a jackpot type A, a jackpot type D, and a jackpot type C. When it becomes a big hit by the first special symbol, it is determined using this table that any one of these three big hits.

  In the jackpot type A, the variation in which the gaming state after the jackpot is a highly accurate and high base continues for 100 times of variable display, and the determination rate is 45%. Further, in the jackpot type D, the variation in which the gaming state after the jackpot is a high-accuracy low base continues 100 times, and the determination rate is 20%. Further, in the jackpot type C, the variation in which the gaming state after the jackpot is a low accuracy and high base continues 100 times, and the determination rate is 35%. It can be said that the ST state is after the big hit A and the big hit D in which the high probability continues for a predetermined number of times.

  As shown in FIG. 21-1 (D), the second special symbol big hit type table used in the characteristic parts 251F to 253F includes the big hit type A. When it becomes a big hit due to the second special symbol, the big hit A is always decided. In the jackpot type A, the variation in which the gaming state after the jackpot is a highly accurate and high base continues for 100 times of variable display, and the determination rate is 100%. It can be said that the ST state is after the jackpot A in which the high probability continues for a predetermined number of times.

(Regarding the flow of various effects of the characteristic part 251F to the characteristic part 253F)
FIG. 21-2 is a timing chart showing the flow of various effects. FIG. 21-2 (A) shows a flow of effects when the jackpot B is achieved in the characteristic portion 251F. FIG. 21-2 (B) shows a flow of effects when the jackpot D is achieved in the characteristic parts 252F and 253F. FIG. 21-2 (C) shows the flow of effects when the jackpot A or the jackpot C is achieved in the characteristic parts 251F to 253F.

  First, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (A), in the feature portion 251F, when the normal state as the low-probability low-base state is changed to the big hit B, the high-probability high base is continued for 50 times as the specific period. To do. After that, 30 times of the 50 times of the high-accuracy low base as the predetermined time period are set as the period with the setting suggestion effect. Furthermore, after that, the remaining 20 highly accurate low base periods are set as the period without setting suggestion. In the period with the setting suggestive effect, an effect in which a telop indicating that the period is the setting suggestive effect is added on the screen of the image display device 5 is also executed. The display of this telop disappears when the period with the setting suggestion effect ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (B), when the jackpot D is controlled in the characteristic portions 252F and 253F and the jackpot D is won again during the highly accurate low base state after the jackpot, the ending period of the jackpot D In, the setting suggestion effect is executed at an appearance rate of 80%. In this way, the feature suggestion effect may be executed by repeatedly executing the big hit D in the characteristic parts 252F and 253F. An ending period in which the setting suggestion effect may be executed is set as the setting suggestion effect period. After that, if the big hit D is won during the high-accuracy low base state, the setting suggestion effect is executed with an appearance rate of 90% in the ending period (setting suggestion effect period) after the end of the big hit D. In this way, as the big hit D is repeated, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect becomes higher. Although the ending period is not shown in the first big hit D, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the first big hit D ending period.

  Next, a case where the feature parts 251F to 253F shown in FIG. 21-2 (C) are controlled to the big hit A or the big hit C will be described. When the big hit A is controlled, the high accuracy high base continues 100 times, and when the big hit C is controlled, the low accuracy high base continues 100 times. However, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is not set for any of the big hits, and the setting suggestion effect is not executed even if the state after these big hits or the repeated big hit is won.

(Regarding setting suggestion effect executed in the characteristic part 251F)
Next, the setting suggestion effect executed in the characteristic part 251F will be described. FIG. 21C is a diagram showing an example of a production operation of setting suggestive production. 21-3 shows how the setting suggestion effect for the big hit B shown in FIG. 21-2 (A) is executed. As shown in FIG. 21-3 (A), when the high-accuracy / high-base state after the big hit B has been executed 20 times, the remaining number display showing the remaining variation number of ST is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5. 251F001 is displayed. The remaining number display is decreased by one each time the variable display is executed once.

  Then, after 50 times of variable display after the end of the big hit B, as shown in FIG. In the period with the setting suggestion effect, the remaining number display 251F001 indicating the remaining number of fluctuations of ST is displayed as “50 remaining times”. Further, at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, a telop image 251F002 in which the characters "setting suggestion chance!" Is displayed is displayed. The characters displayed on the telop image 251F002 move from the right side to the left side with the passage of time. Further, a character image 251F003 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a dialogue image 251F005 of "press the button" is displayed from the character image 251F003. Further, a button image 251F004 for urging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed from the center left of the screen.

  If the setting suggestion effect is not executed, if the player operates the push button 31B during the effective period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, as shown in FIG. The dialogue image 251F006 is displayed. Since the dialogue image 251F006 of "How is it?" Is not a display suggesting the set value, the player cannot know which set value. Note that a symbol such as "x" may be displayed instead of displaying the character.

  Then, even after the variable display is performed 77 times after the end of the big hit B, it is a period with a setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. In the period with the setting suggestion effect, the remaining number display 251F001 indicating the remaining number of fluctuations of ST is displayed as “23 remaining times”. Further, at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, a telop image 251F002 in which the characters "setting suggestion chance!" Is displayed is displayed. Further, from the character image 251F003, as in the case of FIG. 21C, a dialogue image 251F005 of "press the button" is displayed. Further, a button image 251F004 for urging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed from the center left of the screen.

  When the setting suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (E), when the player operates the push button 31B during the effective period during which the operation of the push button 31B is effective, the “high setting expectation high The dialogue image 251F007 of "!" Is displayed. The dialogue image 251F007 of “high expected high setting!” Is a display indicating that the current set value is highly likely to be high.

  After the end of the period with the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the variable display of 50 to 80 times from the end of the big hit B, the period without the suggestion effect of setting is provided during the remaining 20 variable displays. FIG. 21-3 (F) is shown when the remaining ST number is 7 rotations, which is the 93rd time from the end of the big hit B. Since the remaining number of times is less than 20 rotations, no image related to the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Regarding the variable display after the 50th rotation when the gaming state changes from the high-accuracy high base to the high-accuracy low base, the setting suggestion effect period is set up to the 100th rotation when the high-accuracy low base ends. Good.

  FIG. 21-4 is an explanatory diagram of a setting suggestion effect determination table. The setting suggestion effect determination table is a table used when the big hit B is won in the number of rotations after the 50th rotation after the end of the big hit B and at the 70th rotation or less in the setting suggestion effect processing. In addition, although three tables are provided in FIG. 21-4, different tables are used depending on the number of times of winning the big hit B in the number of rotations after the 50th rotation after completion of the big hit B and at 70th rotation or less. .

  FIG. 21-4 (A) is a diagram showing a first setting suggestion effect determination table used when the big hit B is won once in the highly accurate low base state after the end of the big hit B. FIG. 21-4 (B) is a diagram showing a second setting suggestion effect determination table used when the big hit B is won twice in succession in the highly accurate low base state after the end of the big hit B. FIG. 21-4 (C) is a diagram showing a third setting suggestion effect determination table used when the big hit B is won three or more times in succession in the highly accurate low base state after the end of the big hit B. The contents of the character's dialogue executed in the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the setting value are determined using these tables. These setting suggestion effect determination tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  As shown in the first setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 21-4 (A), in the setting 1 in the big hit B1 time, the proportion determined as “how should I do?” Is 88%, and “high setting expectation is low! 5%, “High Medium Expectations!”, 4%, “High Expectations!” 3%, “High Confirmation!” There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In setting 2, 88% of the time is determined as "How is it?", 3% is determined as "high setting expectation is low!", And "High setting expectation is medium!" 5%, 4% is determined to be "high setting expectation!", And no percentage is determined to be "high setting confirmed!" (0%). In setting 3, 87% of the time is determined as "How is it?", 3% is determined as "high setting expectation is low!" 4%, the percentage determined as "high setting expectation high!" Is 5%, and the percentage determined as "high setting confirmed!" Is 1%.

  As shown in the second setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 21-4 (B), in the setting 1 in the big hit B2 time, the proportion determined as "how is it?" Is 73%, and "high setting expectation is low! 10%, “High Medium Expectations!”, 9%, “High Expectations!” 8%, “High Confirmation!” There is no percentage determined to be 0% (it is 0%). In setting 2, 73% of the time will be decided as “How is it?”, 8% will be decided as “high setting expectation is low!”, And “High setting expectation is medium!”. 10%, 9% is determined to be "high setting expectation!", And no percentage is determined to be "high setting confirmed!" (0%). In setting 3, 67% of the time will be decided as "How is it?", 8% will be decided as "high setting expectation is low!", And "% will be high expectation!" 9%, the percentage determined to be “high setting expectation high!” Is 10%, and the percentage determined to be “high setting confirmed!” Is 6%.

  As shown in the third setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 21-4 (C), in the setting 1 in the big hit B3 or more times, the proportion determined as "how is it?" Is 58%, and "high setting expectation is low". 15%, “High Medium Expectation!”, 14%, “High Expected High!”, 13%, “High Confirmed! There is no percentage (0%). In setting 2, 58% of the time is determined as "How is it?", 13% is determined as "high setting expectation is low!", And "High medium expectation is medium!" 15%, 14% is determined to be “high setting expectation high!”, And no percentage is determined to be “high setting confirmed!” (0%). In setting 3, the percentage determined as "How is it?" Is 47%, the percentage determined as "High setting expectation is low!" Is 13%, and the percentage determined as "High setting expectation is medium!" 14%, the proportion determined as “high setting expectation high!” Is 15%, and the proportion determined as “high setting confirmed!” Is 11%.

  By setting the data shown in FIG. 21-4, in the setting suggesting effect process, the proportion of the dialogue contents excluding “high setting confirmation!” Is set to “How is it?” However, it is the highest, and there are many cases where the set value is not suggested. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the ratio selected as the content of the dialogue regardless of the number of times of the big hit B is “high setting expectation low!” In the case of setting 1.> “High setting expectation medium!”> “High setting expectation high!”. Further, in the case of setting 2, “high setting expectation is medium!”> “High setting expectation is high!”> “High setting expectation is low!”. Further, in the case of setting 3, “high setting expectation is high!”> “High setting expectation is medium!”> “High setting expectation is low!”. That is, since the appearance rate of the dialogue differs depending on the set value, it becomes possible to suggest the set value from the content of the dialogue. Further, since “high setting confirmed!” Appears only in the most advantageous setting 3, the determination rate of “high setting confirmed!” Is the lowest, but when it appears, it is set to high setting 3. Determine. It should be noted that any character may be displayed at a rate of 100% without being determined as “how is it?”.

  Further, by setting the data shown in FIG. 21D, in the setting suggesting effect process, the more the number of big hits B is, the more easily the dialogue contents suggesting the set value are displayed, and the execution ratio of the setting suggesting effect is increased. Also, as the number of big hits B increases, it becomes easier to display the line of "high setting fixed!", Which is confirmed to be high setting. Therefore, it is confirmed that high hitting B is repeated a plurality of times. You can see the production.

  It should be noted that FIG. 21-4 is merely an example, and any setting suggestion effect other than the dialogue contents indicating a specific setting value may be executed. For example, characters that hint at the set value such as “maybe it feels good” or “lucky!” May be displayed. Alternatively, the set value may be suggested by displaying any one of the plurality of characters.

  FIG. 21-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting suggestion effect process. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed in the variable display effect effect process (S172).

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting suggested flag is set (251FS001). When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion completion flag is not set (N in 251FS001), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to 251FS002. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion completion flag is set (Y in 251FS001), the process ends.

  In 251FS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a high probability state after the end of the big hit B. Whether or not it is a high probability state after the big hit B is finished is determined based on a command that specifies the progress status of the game sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the high-probability state after the end of the big hit B is reached (Y in 251FS002), the control proceeds to 251FS003. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not in the high probability state after the end of the big hit B (N in 251FS002), the process ends.

  In 251FS003, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the number of times stored in the number-of-variations counter that counts the number of variable displays after the end of the big hit, so that the value of the number-of-variations counter is more than 50 and 80 or less. Determine whether or not. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the variation counter is greater than 50 and equal to or less than 80 (Y in 251FS003), the process proceeds to 251FS004. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the variation counter is 20 or less or more than 50 (N in 251FS003), the process ends.

  In 251FS004, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation valid period, which is a period in which the player's pressing operation on the push button 31B can be effectively detected. Whether the operation is in the valid period or not can be confirmed by checking the value of the timer that measures the valid period. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the operation is valid (Y in 251FS004), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to 251FS005. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the operation is not in the valid period (N in 251FS004), the process ends.

  In 251FS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an action of the player pressing the push button 31B is detected. When it is determined that the motion is detected (Y in 251FS005), the effect control CPU 120 determines the dialogue content in the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion effect determination table according to the number of big hits B and the setting value, It is displayed (251FS006). Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting suggestion completed flag (251FS007), and ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that no motion is detected (N in 251FS005), the process ends.

(Regarding the setting suggestion effect executed by the characteristic part 252F and the characteristic part 253F)
Next, the setting suggestion effect executed in the characteristic part 252F and the characteristic part 253F will be described. FIG. 21-6 is a diagram showing an example of a production operation of a setting suggestive production. FIG. 21-6 shows how the setting suggestion effect for the big hit D shown in FIG. 21-2 (B) is executed. As shown in FIG. 21-6 (A), when the big hit D is won again during the high-precision low base state after the big hit D is finished (the big hit D in the high-precision low base is the first time), the image display device 5 is displayed. The effect indicating that the big hit D is achieved is executed.

  Next, in the ending period of the big hit D, the setting suggestion effect using the push button 31B is executed. As shown in FIG. 21-6 (B), in the setting suggestion effect, the button image 252F001 is displayed in the center of the screen. FIG. 21-6 (C) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 21-6 (C), when the pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is selected or when the push button 31B is not operated, the setting suggestion effect is not executed and “×” is displayed on the screen. A failure image 252F002 indicated by "is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (D), when the big hit D is won during the high-precision low base state after the big hit D is finished (the big hit D in the high-precision low base is the second time), the image display device 5 is displayed. The effect indicating that the big hit D has been executed is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (E), in the setting suggestion effect, the button image 252F001 is displayed in the center of the screen, as in the case of the first big hit D after the big hit D. FIG. 21-6 (F) is a diagram showing a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 21-6 (D), when the pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is executed is selected and the player operates the push button 31B, the character A image 252F003 is displayed on the screen as the setting suggestion effect. To be done.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (G), when the big hit D is won during the high-precision low base state after the end of the big hit D (the third big hit D in the high-precision low base), the image display device is displayed. The effect indicating that the big hit D has been given to 5 is executed. Then, the button image 252F001 is displayed in the center of the screen as in the first and second big hits D after the big hit D. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (H), when the pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is executed is selected and the player operates the push button 31B, the character C image 252F004 is displayed on the screen as the setting suggestion effect. Displayed in.

  FIG. 21-7 is a diagram showing a setting suggestion effect determination table. 21-7 (A) is a big hit D continuation first setting suggesting effect determination table, FIG. 21-7 (B) is a big hit D continuation second setting suggesting effect determining table, and FIG. 21-7 (C) is big hit D The continuation 3rd setting suggestion production determination table is shown. These tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The big hit D continuation first setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 21-7 (A) shows the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion effect process when the jackpot D is won again in the highly accurate low base state after the end of the big hit D. It is a table used for determining whether or not to execute and which setting suggestive effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) to be executed when executing. In the setting 1, the ratio determined without the effect is 20%, the ratio determined with the character A is 28%, the ratio determined with the character B is 27%, the ratio determined with the character C is 25%, and the character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In the setting 2, the proportion determined without the effect is 20%, the proportion determined with the character A is 25%, the proportion determined with the character B is 28%, the proportion determined with the character C is 27%, the character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In the setting 3, the proportion determined without the effect is 20%, the proportion determined with the character A is 25%, the proportion determined with the character B is 26%, the proportion determined with the character C is 27%, and the character D. The percentage determined by is 2%.

  The big hit D continuation second setting suggesting effect determination table of FIG. 21-7 (B) is the setting suggesting effect processing when the jackpot D is continuously won twice in the highly accurate low base state after the end of the big hit D. It is a table used for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggesting effect and, when executing, which setting suggesting effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) is to be executed. In the setting 1, the ratio determined without the effect is 10%, the ratio determined with the character A is 31%, the ratio determined with the character B is 30%, the ratio determined with the character C is 29%, and the character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In the setting 2, the ratio determined without the effect is 10%, the ratio determined with the character A is 29%, the ratio determined with the character B is 31%, the ratio determined with the character C is 30%, and the character D. There is no percentage determined to be (0%). In the setting 3, the proportion determined without the effect is 10%, the proportion determined with the character A is 27%, the proportion determined with the character B is 28%, the proportion determined with the character C is 30%, the character D. The percentage determined by is 5%.

  The setting suggestion effect determination table of the big hit D continuation third or more times in FIG. 21-7 (C) is the setting suggestion effect processing when the big hit D is continuously won three or more times in the highly accurate low base state after the end of the big hit D. The table is used to determine whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect and which of the setting suggestion effects (the character A, the character B, the character C, or the character D) is to be executed. In setting 1, there is no ratio (0%) that is determined to have no effect. Further, the proportion determined by the character A is 35%, the proportion determined by the character B is 33%, the proportion determined by the character C is 32%, and there is no proportion determined by the character D (0%). .. In setting 2, there is no ratio (0%) that is determined to have no effect. Further, the proportion determined by the character A is 32%, the proportion determined by the character B is 35%, the proportion determined by the character C is 33%, and the proportion determined by the character D is none (0%). .. In setting 3, there is no ratio (0%) that is determined to have no effect. Further, the proportion determined by the character A is 29%, the proportion determined by the character B is 30%, the proportion determined by the character C is 33%, and the proportion determined by the character D is 8%.

  FIG. 21-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting suggestion effect process. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed in the ending effect process (S177).

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit in the high-accuracy low base (252FS001). Whether or not it is a big hit in the high-accuracy low base is determined based on a command designating a game state. When the production control CPU 120 determines that it is a big hit in the high-accuracy low base (Y in 252FS001), the control proceeds to 252FS002. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not a big hit in the high-accuracy low base (N in 252FS001), the process ends.

  In 252FS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the big hit D continuation counter is 1. The big hit D continuation counter is a counter that is incremented each time the big hit D is won again in the high-accuracy low base state after the big hit D is finished. The counter may be reset by winning a big hit other than the big hit D. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the big hit D continuation counter is 1 (Y in 252FS002), the effect of the setting suggestion effect is made by the big hit D continuation first time suggestion effect determination table according to the set value. The contents are determined (252FS003), and the process proceeds to 252FS007. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the big hit D continuation counter is not 1 (N in 252FS002), the process proceeds to 252FS004.

  In 252FS004, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the big hit D continuation counter is 2. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the big hit D continuation counter is 2 (Y in 252FS004), the effect of the setting suggestion effect is generated by the big hit D continuation second time setting suggestion effect determination table according to the set value. The contents are determined (252FS005), and the process proceeds to 252FS007. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the big hit D continuation counter is not 2 (when it is determined to be 3 or more) (N in 252FS004), the big hit D continuation third time or more is set according to the set value. The effect contents of the setting suggestion effect are determined by the suggestion effect determination table (252FS006), and the process proceeds to 252FS007.

  In 252FS007, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the setting suggestion effect (Y in 252FS007), it sets to execute the determined setting suggestion effect (252FS008), and ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the setting suggestion effect (N in 252FS007), the process ends.

(Regarding the modification of the characteristic part)
Although the characteristic portions 251F to 253F have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, Included in the invention. Below, the modification of the characteristic parts 251F-253F is demonstrated.

  As shown in FIG. 21-2 (A), when the big hit B is set, the high-precision low base period of 30 times after the end of the big hit B is set as the high-precision low base period of 30 times. It was being done. Then, the 20 high-accuracy low base periods after the end of the 30 high-accuracy low base periods are periods without setting suggestion production. However, the high-precision low base period of 20 times after the end of the high-precision low base period of 30 times may be the period with the setting suggestion effect. Further, the period of 50 times of the highly accurate high base immediately after the end of the big hit B may be the period with the setting suggestion effect. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only once for the variable display, not for a plurality of times of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21-5, the case has been described in which the setting suggestion effect is executed for each variable display during the 30 highly accurate low base periods. However, the setting suggestion effect may be executed only when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be able to be executed when the player is controlled to the big hit game state, which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player, during the high accuracy low base period of 30 times. The setting suggestion effect may be executed during the ending period when the jackpot gaming state is controlled. In such a case, a button image may be displayed during the ending period, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed using the table of FIG. 21D when the player's motion is detected. Further, the setting suggestive effect may be executed during the round, or may be executed during the variable display of the variable display controlled to the big hit game state.

  Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during the fanfare period, which is a period informing that the jackpot is controlled when the jackpot is started, or the interval period of the round during the jackpot. Here, if the interval period is lengthened, it is possible to prevent the player from obtaining a large amount of balls in a short period of time, but this gives the player a feeling of delay in the production. However, even if the interval period is lengthened, it is possible to reduce the feeling of delay by executing the setting suggestion effect during the interval period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest rate from becoming too high by acquiring a large number of balls in a short time while preventing a decrease in interest during the interval period.

  In the present embodiment, during the high accuracy / high base, the game according to the second special map is mainly consumed, and the second special map is preferentially consumed over the first special map. In such a case, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during a predetermined period during which the variable display of the second special figure (for example, variable display for four times) held when the high base ends is being executed. .. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during a predetermined period such as 30 rotations including the number of holdings of the second special figure (4 rotations for the number of holdings + 26 rotations of the high-accuracy low base), or for the number of holdings. The mode of the setting suggestion effect may be different between the period (a period of 4 rotations corresponding to the number of holdings) and the other period (a period of high-precision low base 26 rotations). It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect may be executed even when there is a pending storage that is a big hit in the suspension when the high base ends. In such a case, the setting suggestion effect executed in the variable display of the number of holdings of the second special figure during the predetermined period and the setting suggestion executed in the variable display of the first special figure in the high-accuracy low base state You may perform setting suggestion production of a mode different from production.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (A), the setting suggestion effect is displayed during the variable display of the high-accuracy low-base period of 30 times after the high-accuracy high-base state of 50 times after the big hit B ends. The case where it is executed is explained. However, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during the customer waiting demonstration effect instead of the variable display. When the demonstration effect is executed in this way, the setting suggestion effect may be executed as one of the mini games by operating a predetermined operation means such as the push button 31B. Further, when it is executed during the demonstration effect, the setting suggestion may be executed depending on the content of the moving image during the demonstration effect. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when a period in which the start winning is not executed continues for a predetermined period even though the game ball is shot. For example, the setting suggestion may be executed if the start winning is not generated when one minute has elapsed after the game ball was detected by the sensor for detecting the game ball being emitted. In this way, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a period other than during variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 21C, the case where the telop image 251F002 is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the setting suggestive effect-presenting period has been described. However, the background may be switched during the period with the setting suggestion effect. Also, the period with the setting suggestion effect may be a combination of the background switching and the telop image 251F002.

  In the period with the setting suggestion effect, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate immediately after the start of the period with the setting suggestion effect than immediately before the end of the period with the setting suggestion effect. Further, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect may be different instead of the execution ratio being different.

  The setting suggestion effect was a big hit B in the high accuracy low base period of 30 times after the end of the 50 times of the high accuracy high base state without shifting to the big hit A which is advantageous to the player after the completion of the big hit B. In this case, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than that of the first time. In this way, even if a disadvantageous big hit continues, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment by the setting suggestion effect. Also, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be increased as the number of times the disadvantageous big hit continues increases.

  As shown in FIG. 21-5, the case where the setting suggestion effect is not executed when the player's motion is not detected has been described. However, the setting suggestion effect may be executed even when the motion of the player is not detected. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed after the operation valid period has elapsed. In such a case, the setting suggestion effect having a lower reliability than when the player's motion is detected may be executed.

  The setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 21C may have different execution rates depending on whether or not the variable display is a big hit. For example, in the case of the variable display that is a big hit, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than that in the variable display that is a big hit. Also, a setting suggestion effect may be provided in which the execution rate does not differ regardless of whether or not it is a big hit.

  In the invention relating to the characteristic portion 251F, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the big hit B, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the big hit A, continues. After the big hit B ends, when the big hit B is won again in the high accurate high base state, the most advantageous high accurate high base state is given 100 times, but the big hit B is won again in the high accurate low base state. In this case, the highly accurate high base state is only given 50 times. However, since the setting suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even in the case of a disadvantageous big hit. It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect period may be provided after the jackpot when the jackpot C that is most disadvantageous to the player is won.

  As shown in FIG. 21-2 (B), in the characteristic part 252F, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed by continuing the jackpot D, which is disadvantageous to the player, a plurality of times has been described. However, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by continuing the big hit within a predetermined period regardless of the kind of the big hit. Specifically, the setting suggestion effect may be executed under the condition that one of the big hits is won during 100 times of variation different from the normal state after the big hit ends. Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the same or different types of big hits continue. Further, the execution ratio and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed depending on the type of jackpot.

  In the characteristic parts 252F and 253F, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during a period other than the ending period of the big hit. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during the round, or may be executed during the variable display of the variable display controlled to the big hit game state.

  In FIG. 21-7, no effect was selected when the big hit D continued three times or more. However, no big effect may be selected at a low rate even if the big hit D continues a plurality of times. Further, there may be effects that are executed at the same rate regardless of the number of big hits D.

  The setting suggestion effect may be executed for the big hit C shown in FIG. 21-1. In such a case, there may be a setting suggestion effect that is executed at a constant rate in any state. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed for the big hit C, it is desirable that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than that of the big hit D.

  The jackpot D shown in FIG. 21-1 is a jackpot which is in a highly accurate and low base state after the jackpot is over, which makes it difficult for the player to win a start and is in a disadvantageous state for the player. However, even if the big hits that the player feels disadvantageous continue, the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the player can expect to win the big hit D again. Note that the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the big hit D is first won.

  The case where the character is displayed as the setting suggestive effect has been described. However, the setting suggestion effect may be indicated by changing the color of the background. In such a case, a background image that confirms the high setting may be displayed based on the disadvantage that the jackpot is disadvantageous multiple times when the high setting is performed.

  The CPU 103 of the game controlling microcomputer 100 transmits information about the set value as shown in step 112IWS031 of FIG. 20-9, step 112IWS108 of FIG. 20-13, and the like. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect process based on the information about the set value. In such a case, when the set value command is not normal as the information related to the set value, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting. By doing so, it is possible to prevent suggesting an incorrect setting value to the player without reducing the number of times the setting suggesting effect is executed. It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect selected by the lottery is executed without executing only the pattern for confirming the high setting without making a tentative decision (temporary setting) to execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting. It may be done. Further, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

  Note that the control in the above-mentioned characteristic portion may be applied in combination with each other. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the effect related to the setting suggestion.

(Explanation of Invention Concerning Characteristic Section 251F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 251F includes the following inventions regarding the characteristic portion 251F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, depending on the set value before and after the change of the set value, any one of giraffe, elephant, and lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information to suggest the set value. There was a game machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). Further, there is a gaming machine that is controlled to be in an advantageous state when it is controlled to be in an advantageous state in a specific period than when it is controlled to be in an advantageous state outside of the specific period (for example, see JP-A-2002-66021). ..

  However, when performing the effect suggesting the setting as in JP 2010-200902 A on the gaming machine as in JP 2002-66021 A, there is room for improvement in the execution timing of the effect suggesting the setting. It was In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 251F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
When the advantageous state is controlled within a specific period (for example, a period of 50 high-accuracy bases after the end of big hit B), when the advantageous state is controlled, for example, 50 high-precision high bases after the end of big hit B are set. Special state control means capable of controlling to a special state advantageous to the player (for example, 100 times of high accurate high base) at a higher rate than in the case of being controlled to the advantageous state in a period of high accurate low base after the end) (For example, CPU 103),
And a setting suggestion effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21C) that suggests the set value to the player,
The setting suggesting effect executing means is configured to perform the setting suggesting effect for a predetermined period after the end of the specific period (for example, a period with setting suggesting effects of 30 times of the high accuracy low base after 50 times of the high accuracy high base after the end of the big hit B). A setting suggestion effect can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the setting suggestion effect is executed in a predetermined period after the end of the specific period, it is possible to draw attention to the execution timing of the effect suggesting the setting, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting changing process),
When the advantageous state is controlled within a specific period (for example, a period of 50 high-accuracy bases after the end of big hit B), when the advantageous state is controlled, for example, 50 high-precision high bases after the end of big hit B are set. Special state control means capable of controlling to a special state advantageous to the player (for example, 100 times of high accurate high base) at a higher rate than in the case of being controlled to the advantageous state in a period of high accurate low base after the end) (For example, CPU 103),
And a setting suggestion effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21C) that suggests the set value to the player,
The setting suggesting effect executing means is configured to perform the setting suggesting effect for a predetermined period after the end of the specific period (for example, a period with setting suggesting effects of 30 times of the high accuracy low base after 50 times of the high accuracy high base after the end of the big hit B). The setting suggestion effect can be executed when the advantageous state is controlled (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the jackpot gaming state is controlled in the period with the setting suggestion effect).

  According to such a configuration, since the setting suggestion effect is executed when the advantageous state is controlled in the predetermined period after the end of the specific period, it is possible to pay attention to the execution timing of the effect suggesting the setting, and the game is played. The interest in is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific period is a period after the advantageous state ends (for example, the specific period is a period of 50 highly accurate high bases after the end of the big hit B).

  With such a configuration, the interest is improved because the specific period starts after the advantageous state ends.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The predetermined period is a period in which variable display is executed at least a plurality of times (for example, in the predetermined period, a setting suggestion effect of 30 high-precision low bases after 50 high-precision high bases after the end of the big hit B has ended) There is a period).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment even if the player is not controlled to the advantageous state during the specific period.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
A predetermined period notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined period notification effect (for example, an effect for displaying the telop image 251F002) for informing the player of the predetermined period is further provided. ..

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand that it is the predetermined period.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
After being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) in the predetermined period (for example, a setting suggesting effect period), the predetermined period is again returned to without transitioning to the special state (for example, a highly accurate high base state). In the case of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state), the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect becomes high (for example, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect becomes high when the number of times of winning the disadvantageous big hit is large. Become).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a player's disappointment that was not repeatedly controlled to the advantageous state during the specific period.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Further comprising an operating means (for example, push button 31B) operable by the player,
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B).

  With such a configuration, the player's motivation for operation can be improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 of FIG. 20-9, FIG. 20-13 Step 112 IWS108),
The setting suggestion effect execution means,
The setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the setting value information output from the setting value information output means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, setting suggestion effect of FIG. 21C).
If the setting value information output from the setting value information output unit is not normal, the setting suggestion effect executing unit sets a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As described above, the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, when the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect assuming that the setting value of the low setting is set. Is possible).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous set value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Characteristic Section 252F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 252F includes the following inventions regarding the characteristic portion 252F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, depending on the set value before and after the change of the set value, any one of giraffe, elephant, and lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information to suggest the set value. There was a game machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). Further, there has been a gaming machine in which a so-called latent probability varying state, which is a highly accurate low base state, is repeated (for example, see JP 2011-78670 A).

  However, when performing an effect that suggests a setting as in JP 2010-200902 A on a gaming machine such as JP 2011-78670 A, there is room for improvement regarding the execution timing of the effect that suggests a setting. It was In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 252F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
A setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-6) that suggests the set value to the player,
The setting suggestion effect execution means is set based on being repeatedly controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit D) within a predetermined period (for example, for 100 high-precision low bases after the end of big hit D). Suggestive production can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the setting suggestion effect is executed by being repeatedly controlled to the advantageous state within the predetermined period, it is possible to draw attention to the execution timing of the effect suggesting the setting, and the interest of the game is improved. To do.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The predetermined period is a period after the advantageous state has ended (for example, the predetermined period is a period of 100 highly accurate low bases after the end of the big hit D).

  With such a configuration, the interest is improved because the predetermined period starts after the advantageous state ends.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The setting suggestion effect is an effect executed when the advantageous state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-6, the setting suggestion effect is executed in the ending period of the big hit).

  With such a configuration, attention can be paid at the end of the advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (eg, big hit A) and a second advantageous state (eg, big hit D), which is less advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect based on being repeatedly controlled to the second advantageous state within the predetermined period (for example, 100 times of high-accuracy low base after end of big hit D). The setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the fact that the jackpot D is repeatedly controlled during the period.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment when the disadvantageous advantageous state is repeated.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The predetermined period has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state, and is a period to be controlled to a specific state in which the execution frequency of the variable display is the same as the normal state (for example, a high-accuracy low base state). Yes, the specific state is repeated based on the fact that the second advantageous state is controlled repeatedly within the predetermined period (for example, the jackpot D is repeatedly controlled in the 100 highly accurate low bases after the jackpot D is finished). Accurate low base state is repeated based on that).

  According to such a configuration, the setting suggestion effect is executed even if the specific state is repeated, so that it is possible to reduce the player's further disappointment.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The more the number of times the second advantageous state is repeatedly controlled, the higher the reliability of the setting suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-7, the more the number of big hits is controlled, the more reliable the performance becomes. Setting suggestive effect is determined using a high table).

  According to such a configuration, even if the second advantageous state is repeated, the highly reliable setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the player can further reduce the disappointment.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Further comprising an operating means (for example, push button 31B) operable by the player,
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B).

  With such a configuration, the player's motivation for operation can be improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 of FIG. 20-9, FIG. 20-13 Step 112 IWS108),
The setting suggestion effect execution means,
The setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the setting value information output from the setting value information output means (for example, effect control CPU 120, setting suggestion effect in FIG. 21-6),
If the setting value information output from the setting value information output unit is not normal, the setting suggestion effect executing unit sets a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As described above, the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, when the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect assuming that the setting value of the low setting is set. Is possible).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous set value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Explanation of Invention Concerning Characteristic Section 253F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 253F includes the following inventions relating to the characteristic portion 253F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, depending on the set value before and after the change of the set value, any one of giraffe, elephant, and lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information to suggest the set value. There was a game machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). Further, there has been a gaming machine in which a so-called latent probability varying state, which is a highly accurate low base state, is repeated (for example, see JP 2011-78670 A).

  However, when performing an effect that suggests a setting as in JP 2010-200902 A on a gaming machine such as JP 2011-78670 A, there is room for improvement regarding the execution timing of the effect that suggests a setting. It was In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 253F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, high probability state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the normal state after the end of the advantageous state,
A setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-6) that suggests the set value to the player,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (eg, big hit A) and a second advantageous state (eg, big hit D), which is less advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect is different between when the first advantageous state is controlled and when the second advantageous state is controlled (for example, in the big hit A, the setting suggestive effect is not executed, but the big hit D Then the setting suggestion production may be executed).

  With such a configuration, since the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different depending on the type of the advantageous state, it is possible to focus attention on the execution timing of the effect suggesting the setting, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The setting suggestion effect is an effect executed when the advantageous state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-6, the setting suggestion effect is executed in the ending period of the big hit).

  With such a configuration, attention can be paid at the end of the advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect based on being repeatedly controlled to the second advantageous state within a predetermined period after the advantageous state is ended (for example, after the jackpot D is finished). The setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the fact that the jackpot D is repeatedly controlled during the 100 high-accuracy low-base periods.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment when the disadvantageous second advantageous state is repeated.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
The predetermined period has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state, and is a period to be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high-accuracy low base state) in which the execution frequency of the variable display is the same as the normal state. Yes, the specific state is repeated based on the fact that the second advantageous state is repeatedly controlled within the predetermined period (for example, the jackpot D is repeatedly controlled during the 100 highly accurate low bases after the jackpot D is finished). Setting suggestion production can be executed based on that).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment when the disadvantageous second advantageous state is repeated.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The more the number of times the second advantageous state is repeatedly controlled, the higher the reliability of the setting suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-7, the more the number of big hits is controlled, the more reliable the performance becomes. Setting suggestive effect is determined using a high table).

  According to such a configuration, even if the second advantageous state is repeated, the highly reliable setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the player can further reduce the disappointment.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
Further comprising an operating means (for example, push button 31B) operable by the player,
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B).

  With such a configuration, the player's motivation for operation can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, the CPU 103 of the game controlling microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 of FIG. 20-9, FIG. 20-13 Step 112 IWS108),
The setting suggestion effect execution means,
The setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the setting value information output from the setting value information output means (for example, effect control CPU 120, setting suggestion effect of FIG. 21-6),
If the setting value information output from the setting value information output unit is not normal, the setting suggestion effect executing unit sets a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect (for example, when the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect as being set to the low setting value). Is possible).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suggesting an erroneous set value without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

  1 Pachinko gaming machine, 2 gaming board, 3 gaming machine frame, 4A, 4B special symbol display device, 5 image display device, 6A winning ball device, 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker , 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12 production control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay board, 20 ordinary pattern display, 21 gate switch, 22A, 22B start opening switch , 23 count switch, 30 ball operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 103 CPU, 104, 124 random number circuit, 105, 125 I / O, 120 CPU for production control, 23 display control unit.

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Special state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state is higher than the normal state,
A setting suggestion effect executing means capable of executing any one of the setting suggestion effects of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects for suggesting the set value to the player,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is less advantageous than the first advantageous state,
Wherein the case which has been controlled to the first preferred state, Ri ratio Do different to perform the setting suggested effect between when controlled to the second preferred state,
A gaming machine in which the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different depending on the number of times the second advantageous state is controlled . Further comprising setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set among the setting values of the plurality of stages,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the setting suggestion effect executing means limits execution of the setting suggestion effect when the setting value information output from the setting value information output means is not normal.

Images